JP2017074524A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of executing performance control according to delay control.SOLUTION: When an operation to a stop switch is received during a freeze (YES in Ss11) in a slot machine for generating a freeze for delaying progress of a game, control data are set such that control to be started newly according to the operation can be executed until common specific timing is reached regardless of timing when the operation has been received, and control based on the control data is executed (Ss13). During a freeze, reel performance control for stopping a predetermined display mode is performed, and initial position return control is performed after stopping the predetermined display mode to return a relative positional relationship between respective reels to a positional relationship at the time of completion of the previous game before shifting to steady rotation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet number.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  Some slot machines of this type are controlled so that the next game cannot be started until one game standby time called “wait time” (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses. This wait time is defined in order to limit the number of games per unit time from the viewpoint of preventing shooting characteristics. Therefore, in the slot machine, it is determined whether or not the wait time has elapsed for each game. .

  In addition to the wait time, as one of the effects of the game, the so-called “freeze”, which delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period by holding the control corresponding to the bet operation, the start operation, or the reel stop operation, is called. There is a slot machine that performs delayed control.

  In such a slot machine, for example, during freezing, there is an effect game in which a sub reel displayed on a liquid crystal display device is rotated and a symbol of the sub reel is fixedly displayed according to an operation on the touch panel device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-56077 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the timing at which the effect game ends differs depending on the operation timing during the effect game by the sub reel. On the other hand, the freeze occurs over a predetermined period regardless of the operation. For this reason, if the operation timing is early, only the freezing continues even though the production game is ended, and there is a possibility that the player may have an impression that it has been wasted.

  The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine capable of executing effect control in accordance with delay control.

(1) A variable capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. A display device,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. The slot machine (second embodiment and [output during the freeze period) in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. The slot machine 1) in the first modification of the column]
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
After the game is started, effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means has been operated (processing for enabling the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R upon reaching constant speed rotation) When,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the valid reception state ( Reel stop control),
An activation timing in which a delay period (freeze period counter) is set when the delay condition is satisfied (when a specific game is started), and the effective reception state is set more than when the delay condition is not satisfied. Enabling delay means (main control unit 41, freeze-related processing Ss06, Ss17),
Operation accepting means (start switch 7, effect switch 56, etc.) for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is accepted by the operation accepting means during the delay period, the plurality of variable display areas are arranged so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the variable display areas becomes a predetermined positional relationship. Control of variation of the variable display area is performed to execute a predetermined effect (such as reel effect control based on control data during freeze), and a specific timing (1. during freeze) regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For the control based on the control data corresponding to the successful pattern to be executed, the operation is performed during the operation reception period in the control regardless of whether the control is started when the operation is received or the timing at which the operation is received. 1. Common specific timing when the control is terminated if not accepted, 2. Failure pattern executed during freeze If the operation is not accepted during the freeze, regardless of whether the operation was started when the operation was accepted or the timing at which the operation was accepted, 3. Specific execution timing at which the operation ends, 3. Execution execution means (Ss10 to Ss17 for freeze-related processing, main control unit) that executes the predetermined operation until the freeze period counter reaches 0 and the freeze ends 41, see FIGS. 34 and 35),
The positional relationship when the predetermined effect is ended so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas that has become the predetermined positional relationship by executing the predetermined effect is random. And a positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) that is determined until the predetermined effect is started,
In the delay period after the start of the game, the effect executing means is configured to store the plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is the predetermined positional relationship. After performing the variation control, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is changed to the positional relationship determined by the positional relationship determining means ([after the stop of the turn during the freeze period) Control example], see Modification 1),
In the delay period, the effective reception state control means is changed to a positional relationship in which the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is determined by the positional relationship determination unit by the effect execution unit. After that, the effective acceptance state is set (see the first modification in the column “Regarding the control after stopping the turn during the freeze period”).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is started by receiving an operation during the delay period, while the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, a predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the predetermined performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. Occurrence of inconvenience that is caused to the player can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved by the delay period and the predetermined effect.

  Further, as the predetermined effect in the delay period after the start of the game, the variable display areas are controlled so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas becomes the predetermined positional relationship. In the display area display mode, an impactful effect can be performed, and the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display regions that has a predetermined positional relationship when the predetermined rendering is ended is a random positional relationship. change. For this reason, even if a predetermined effect having a predetermined positional relationship is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the predetermined effect is not performed, and technical intervention by the player by performing the predetermined effect Thus, the gaming property of the slot machine for deriving the display result is not impaired.

(2) Variables capable of deriving display results to each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. A display device,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. The slot machine (second embodiment and [output during the freeze period) in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. The slot machine 1) in the first modification of the column]
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
Effective reception state control means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) for making an effective reception state for effectively receiving the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the valid reception state ( Reel stop control),
An activation timing in which a delay period (freeze period counter) is set when the delay condition is satisfied (when a specific game is started), and the effective reception state is set more than when the delay condition is not satisfied. Enabling delay means (main control unit 41, freeze-related processing Ss06, Ss17),
Operation accepting means (start switch 7, effect switch 56, etc.) for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is accepted by the operation accepting means during the delay period, the plurality of variable display areas are arranged so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the variable display areas becomes a predetermined positional relationship. Control of variation of the variable display area is performed to execute a predetermined effect (such as reel effect control based on control data during freeze), and a specific timing (1. during freeze) regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For the control based on the control data corresponding to the successful pattern to be executed, the operation is performed during the operation reception period in the control regardless of whether the control is started when the operation is received or the timing at which the operation is received. 1. Common specific timing when the control is terminated if not accepted, 2. Failure pattern executed during freeze If the operation is not accepted during the freeze, regardless of whether the operation was started when the operation was accepted or the timing at which the operation was accepted, 3. Specific execution timing at which the operation ends, 3. Execution execution means (Ss10 to Ss17 for freeze-related processing, main control unit) that executes the predetermined operation until the freeze period counter reaches 0 and the freeze ends 41, see FIGS. 34 and 35),
The positional relationship when the predetermined effect is ended so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas that has become the predetermined positional relationship by executing the predetermined effect is random. And a positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) determined after the start of the predetermined effect,
In the delay period after the start of the game, the effect executing means is configured to store the plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is the predetermined positional relationship. After performing the variation control, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is changed to the positional relationship determined by the positional relationship determining means ([after the stop of the turn during the freeze period) Control example], see Modification 1),
In the delay period, the effective reception state control means is changed to a positional relationship in which the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is determined by the positional relationship determination unit by the effect execution unit. After that, the effective acceptance state is set (see the first modification in the column “Regarding the control after stopping the turn during the freeze period”).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is started by receiving an operation during the delay period, while the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, a predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the predetermined performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. Occurrence of inconvenience that is caused to the player can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved by the delay period and the predetermined effect.

  Further, as the predetermined effect in the delay period after the start of the game, the variable display areas are controlled so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas becomes the predetermined positional relationship. In the display area display mode, an impactful effect can be performed, and the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display regions that has a predetermined positional relationship when the predetermined rendering is ended is a random positional relationship. change. For this reason, even if a predetermined effect having a predetermined positional relationship is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the predetermined effect is not performed, and technical intervention by the player by performing the predetermined effect Thus, the gaming property of the slot machine for deriving the display result is not impaired.

  The slot machine according to (1) or (2) may further include the following configuration.

  The positional relationship determining means may determine a change amount of the positional relationship with each of the plurality of variable display regions at random (change amount determination lottery). As a result, the positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas when making the valid reception state after the predetermined effect ends becomes more irregular.

  The positional relationship determining means reduces the rate at which the combination of the change amounts of the positional relationship between each variable display area and another variable display area is the same combination each time the predetermined effect (reel effect control) is performed. Combination reduction means (change amount determination lottery using random numbers whose total numbers are relatively prime) may be provided. Thereby, it can prevent that the positional relationship of the identification information of each of the some variable display area at the time of setting it as an effective reception state for every predetermined production produces a bias | inclination.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the ratio that the combination of the change amounts of the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area becomes the same combination for each predetermined effect, for example, a random number used for determining each variable display area As such, there are a method using a random number in which the total number of update ranges is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing each time the predetermined effect is performed, and the like.

  The positional relationship determining means is the same change amount reducing means for reducing the rate at which the change amount of the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area is the same (change amount using a random number whose total number is relatively prime) (Decision lottery) may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid as much as possible that the predetermined positional relationship is maintained when the effective reception state is set. In addition, as a method of reducing the rate at which the amount of change in the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area is the same, for example, as a random number used to determine each variable display area, the total number of update ranges is mutually A method that uses a random number that is a prime number, a method that uses a random number whose period start value is randomly changed, and a random number extraction timing that is used for each variable display area determination The method of shifting is applicable.

  The positional relationship determining means may randomly determine one of the positional relationships from the relative positional relationship between the identification information of a plurality of different variable display areas determined in advance (positional determination lottery). Good. Thereby, it can prevent that the positional relationship of the identification information of each of the some variable display area at the time of setting it in an effective reception state produces a bias | inclination.

(3) A variable display device capable of deriving a display result in a variable display area that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. ,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated in accordance with the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game (second embodiment and [control after stopping a turn during a freeze period] column Slot machine 1) in Example 2,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
After the game is started, effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means has been operated (processing for enabling the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R upon reaching constant speed rotation) When,
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the valid acceptance state; ,
An activation timing in which a delay period (freeze period counter) is set when the delay condition is satisfied (when a specific game is started), and the effective reception state is set more than when the delay condition is not satisfied. Enabling delay means (main control unit 41, freeze-related processing Ss06, Ss17),
Operation accepting means (start switch 7, effect switch 56, etc.) for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means during the delay period, a predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area to perform a predetermined effect (such as a reel effect control based on control data during freeze). Regardless of the timing at which the predetermined performance is started, the specific timing in the delay period (1. control starts based on the control data corresponding to the success pattern executed during the freeze is accepted by the operation) 1. A common specific timing at which the control is terminated when the operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period in the control, regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted. For control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern, the control is started when the operation is accepted. Regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted, a common specific timing at which the control ends when the operation is not accepted during the freeze 3. The freeze period counter reaches 0 and the freeze Effect execution means for executing the predetermined effect until it reaches (end timing) (freezing-related processing Ss10 to Ss17, processing by the main control unit 41, see FIGS. 34 and 35);
After the predetermined variation control is performed in the delay period, the acceleration time is set so that the acceleration time until the moving speed of the plurality of types of identification information becomes a specified speed is random, and the predetermined effect in the delay period. Acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) for determining before executing
The effect execution means performs the predetermined variation control in the delay period after the start of the game, and then sets the movement speeds of the plurality of types of identification information according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means. Accelerate until the specified speed is reached (refer to the modified example 2 in the column [Regarding the control after stopping the turn during the freeze period]),
In the delay period, the effective reception state control means sets the effective reception state after the predetermined fluctuation control is performed and the predetermined speed is reached ([after stopping the turn during the freeze period) (Refer to Modification 2 in the column).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is started by receiving an operation during the delay period, while the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, a predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the predetermined performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. Occurrence of inconvenience that is caused to the player can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved by the delay period and the predetermined effect.

  In addition, since the predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area as the predetermined effect in the delay period after the start of the game, an impactful effect can be performed in the display mode of the variable display area, and the predetermined effect is ended. The acceleration time until the moving speed of the identification information reaches the specified speed is randomly changed. For this reason, even if a predetermined performance is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the predetermined performance is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the predetermined performance. The playability of the slot machine is not impaired.

(4) A variable display device capable of deriving a display result in a variable display area that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each identifiable in a predetermined order. ,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated in accordance with the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game (second embodiment and [control after stopping a turn during a freeze period] column Slot machine 1) in Example 2,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
After the game is started, effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means has been operated (processing for enabling the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R upon reaching constant speed rotation) When,
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the valid acceptance state; ,
An activation timing in which a delay period (freeze period counter) is set when the delay condition is satisfied (when a specific game is started), and the effective reception state is set more than when the delay condition is not satisfied. Enabling delay means (main control unit 41, freeze-related processing Ss06, Ss17),
Operation accepting means (start switch 7, effect switch 56, etc.) for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means during the delay period, a predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area to perform a predetermined effect (such as a reel effect control based on control data during freeze). Regardless of the timing at which the predetermined performance is started, the specific timing in the delay period (1. control starts based on the control data corresponding to the success pattern executed during the freeze is accepted by the operation) 1. A common specific timing at which the control is terminated when the operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period in the control, regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted. For control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern, the control is started when the operation is accepted. Regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted, a common specific timing at which the control ends when the operation is not accepted during the freeze 3. The freeze period counter reaches 0 and the freeze Effect execution means for executing the predetermined effect until it reaches (end timing) (freezing-related processing Ss10 to Ss17, processing by the main control unit 41, see FIGS. 34 and 35);
After the predetermined variation control is performed in the delay period, the acceleration time is set so that the acceleration time until the moving speed of the plurality of types of identification information becomes a specified speed is random, and the predetermined effect in the delay period. Acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) determined after the start of
The effect execution means performs the predetermined variation control in the delay period after the start of the game, and then sets the movement speeds of the plurality of types of identification information according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means. Accelerate until the specified speed is reached (refer to the modified example 2 in the column [Regarding the control after stopping the turn during the freeze period]),
In the delay period, the effective reception state control means sets the effective reception state after the predetermined fluctuation control is performed and the predetermined speed is reached ([after stopping the turn during the freeze period) (Refer to Modification 2 in the column).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is started by receiving an operation during the delay period, while the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, a predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the predetermined performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. Occurrence of inconvenience that is caused to the player can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved by the delay period and the predetermined effect.

  In addition, since the predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area as the predetermined effect in the delay period after the start of the game, an impactful effect can be performed in the display mode of the variable display area, and the predetermined effect is ended. The acceleration time until the moving speed of the identification information reaches the specified speed is randomly changed. For this reason, even if a predetermined performance is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the predetermined performance is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the predetermined performance. The playability of the slot machine is not impaired.

  The slot machine of (3) or (4) may further include the following configuration.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas, and according to a combination of the display results derived and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. A prize can be generated,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) may determine the acceleration time at random for each of the plurality of variable display areas (acceleration time determination lottery). Thereby, since the acceleration time is randomly changed for each variable display area, the acceleration time of each variable display area can be made more irregular even when a predetermined effect for displaying specific identification information is performed.

  The acceleration time determining means is the same combination reducing means for reducing the rate at which the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display area is the same for each predetermined effect (acceleration time determination using random numbers whose totals are relatively prime (Lottery) may be provided. Thereby, it can prevent that the acceleration time until it becomes a regulation speed for every predetermined production produces a bias. In addition, as a method of reducing the ratio that the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display area becomes the same combination each time a predetermined effect is performed, for example, as a random number used for determining each variable display area, A method using a random number whose total number is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing each time the predetermined effect is performed, and the like are applicable.

  The acceleration time determination means includes the same acceleration time reduction means (acceleration time determination lottery using random numbers whose totals are relatively prime) for reducing the rate at which the acceleration times are the same for each variable display area. May be. Thereby, it can avoid as much as possible that the acceleration time in each of a some variable display area becomes the same. As a method for reducing the rate at which the acceleration time is the same for each variable display area, for example, as a random number used to determine each variable display area, a method using a random number whose update range is relatively prime, As a random number used for determining each variable display area, a method using a random number whose cycle start value is randomly changed, a method for shifting a random number extraction timing used for each variable display area determination, and the like are applicable.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas, and according to a combination of the display results derived and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. A prize can be generated,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) is to randomly determine any combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations of acceleration times for the different variable display areas (acceleration time combination determination lottery). May be. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the acceleration time for each of the plurality of variable display areas from being biased.

(5) Provided with a variable display device capable of deriving a display result in a variable display area capable of variably displaying by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable in a predetermined order ,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated in accordance with the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game (second embodiment and [control after stopping a turn during a freeze period] column Slot machine 1) in Example 2,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
After the game is started, effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means has been operated (processing for enabling the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R upon reaching constant speed rotation) When,
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the valid acceptance state; ,
An activation timing in which a delay period (freeze period counter) is set when the delay condition is satisfied (when a specific game is started), and the effective reception state is set more than when the delay condition is not satisfied. Enabling delay means (main control unit 41, freeze-related processing Ss06, Ss17),
Operation accepting means (start switch 7, effect switch 56, etc.) for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means during the delay period, a predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area to perform a predetermined effect (such as a reel effect control based on control data during freeze). Regardless of the timing at which the predetermined performance is started, the specific timing in the delay period (1. control starts based on the control data corresponding to the success pattern executed during the freeze is accepted by the operation) 1. A common specific timing at which the control is terminated when the operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period in the control, regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted. For control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern, the control is started when the operation is accepted. Regardless of whether the operation is accepted or the timing at which the operation is accepted, a common specific timing at which the control ends when the operation is not accepted during the freeze 3. The freeze period counter reaches 0 and the freeze Effect execution means for executing the predetermined effect until it reaches (end timing) (freezing-related processing Ss10 to Ss17, processing by the main control unit 41, see FIGS. 34 and 35);
When the predetermined effect is executed, initial position specifying means for specifying an initial position (a position of the reel before the reel effect control) that is the position of the identification information of the variable display area before the predetermined effect is performed (FIG. 35)
The effect execution means performs the predetermined variation control in the delay period after the start of the game, and then returns the position of the identification information in the variable display area to the initial position (initial position return control in FIG. 35). ,
The valid acceptance state control means sets the identification information in the variable display area to the valid acceptance state after the position of the identification information of the variable display area is returned to the initial position in the delay period (FIG. 35).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is started by receiving an operation during the delay period, while the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, a predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the predetermined performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. Occurrence of inconvenience that is caused to the player can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved by the delay period and the predetermined effect.

  In addition, since the predetermined variation control is performed on the variable display area as the predetermined effect in the delay period after the start of the game, an impactful effect can be performed in the display mode of the variable display area, and the predetermined effect is ended. After returning the position of the identification information in the variable display area to the initial position, the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. For this reason, even if a predetermined performance is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the predetermined performance is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the predetermined performance. The playability of the slot machine is not impaired.

  The effect executing means further performs control for returning the position of the identification information of the variable display area to the initial position in the predetermined effect, and then suggests that the position has returned to the initial position (for example, specifying the reel LED 55) The lighting may be performed in the above manner.

  The predetermined effects in the above (1) to (5) are, for example, specific identification information that has a predetermined positional relationship in the variable display area is temporarily stopped (completely stopped) for a predetermined time, and subtlely shaken. Control that includes moving objects), control that does not stop, but moves at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed when specific identification information is displayed. This includes control for displaying the identification information while moving it in the variable display area.

  “Delaying the activation timing to enter the valid reception state over the delay period” means that control that does not accept the operation of the derivation operation means (control that does not validate), even if the operation of the derivation operation means is accepted Any method may be used as long as the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed by performing control that does not derive the result.

  The specific timing may be a common timing that is not affected by the timing at which the predetermined performance is started. For example, the specific timing may be one timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the delay period was started, Moreover, the timing when the first period elapses after the delay period is started and the timing when the second period elapses after the delay period is started may be included.

  (6) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (5), the predetermined effect executing means controls the variable display device in a manner that is not performed during the delay period except during the delay period. Thus, the predetermined effect is executed (see FIG. 21 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined presentation is executed by controlling the variable display device in a manner that is not performed outside the delay period, the variable display device can improve the interest during the delay period. it can.

(7) In any one of the above slot machines (1) to (6), privilege granting means (sub control unit 91) for granting a privilege (navigation stock acquisition, premier effect execution, set value suggestion effect execution, etc.) is provided. Prepared,
The effect execution means informs that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means by executing the predetermined effect (see FIG. 29G).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the predetermined effect is executed during the delay period.

  In addition, a privilege is a value (probability mode lottery, Navistock, etc.) that directly affects the ratio (medal payout rate) of the gaming value given to the player to the gaming value used for setting the number of bets, It does not directly affect the ratio of the gaming value given to the player to the gaming value used to set the bet amount, but is a value that is beneficial to the player in the progress of the game (suggested effect, finalized effect, (Refer to the “About Benefits” column in the modification).

(8) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (7), the operation reception unit performs the predetermined operation (start switch 7) in a predetermined reception period (operation reception period) of the delay period. Operation) (such as Ss10 in FIG. 30),
The effect executing means executes the predetermined effect after the acceptance period has elapsed even when the predetermined operation is not accepted in the acceptance period of the delay period (determined as YES in Ss12 of FIG. 30). Ss13 is executed even after the operation is performed).

  According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined operation is not accepted, the predetermined effect is executed. For this reason, even though the delay period has continued, the operation has not been accepted and the predetermined effect is not executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to have an impression that the game has been performed.

(9) In any one of the above slot machines (1) to (8), the operation receiving means starts operation receiving means (start switch 7) for receiving an operation for starting variable display in the variable display device. Including
The slot machine
When the determination result of the pre-determining means is a specific result (special winning) in which a specific winning (special) is permitted among the plurality of types of winnings, a predetermined suggestion effect (promotion effect, FIG. 28 ( a) the suggestion effect execution means (acceleration effect execution process) for executing
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege (acquisition of navigation stock, execution of a premier effect, execution of a set value suggestion effect, etc.) and (AT lottery processing)
The activation delay means is more effective when the delay period is a specific game (the fourth game of the fourth RB in BB1 or BB2, the specific game) than when the game is other than the specific game. And delaying the timing for the delay period,
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect by changing the display state of the variable display device by performing a predetermined variation control in the delay period (see FIG. 29, etc.)
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the pre-determining means is the specific result, a specific timing (a timing at which “black BAR” is stopped at the lower stage among timings at which “white 7” is stopped on the winning line for the left reel 2L, On the condition that the derivation operation accepting unit accepts the operation at the timing when “white 7” is stopped on the winning line for the reel 2C and the right reel 2R), the specific display result is derived (the BAR cherry is won and the prize is won). Stop “White 7-White 7-White 7” on line L1),
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is not the specific result, a special display result different from the specific display result is derived on condition that the derivation operation reception unit accepts an operation at the same timing as the specific timing. (The BAR cherry is awarded and “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1).
In the previous game (the third game of the fourth RB in BB1 or BB2, the previous game) in which the next game becomes the specific game, the suggestion effect execution unit determines that the determination result of the prior determination unit is the specific result Even if not, execute the same effect as the suggestion effect (promotion effect, see FIG. 29A),
The predetermined effect execution means derives other than the specific display result as the display result of the previous game by performing a variation control (variation control according to the failure pattern) different from the specific variation control among the predetermined variation control. When this is done, regardless of the display result, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas does not change to the predetermined positional relationship (the specific outcome is not stopped on the winning line L1, see FIG. 29 (i)). ), By performing the specific variation control, when the special display result is derived as the display result of the previous game, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas is changed to a predetermined positional relationship, It is informed that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means (the specific outcome is stopped on the winning line L1, see FIG. 29 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, control for changing the display state of the variable display device by performing predetermined variation control during the delay period in the specific game is performed. Further, during the delay period, a privilege is granted on condition that specific variation control for executing a predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, whether or not the specific variation control has been performed is an interest for the player. Whether or not specific variation control that is of interest to such a player has been performed can be notified as follows.

  First, a specific game is set as a predetermined game, and in the previous game in which the next game is the specific game, even when the determination result of the predetermination means is not the specific result, the execution is performed when the specific result is reached. The same effect as the suggested effect is executed. When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, the specific display result is derived by operating at a specific timing. For this reason, even when the same effect as the suggestion effect is executed in the previous game, it is possible to suggest that the operation is performed at a specific timing, and it is possible to increase the rate at which the special display result is derived in the previous game.

  In this way, the variation control different from the specific variation control for executing the predetermined effect during the delay period in the specific game which is the next game after providing the previous game in which the ratio at which the special display result is derived is increased. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas is not changed to the predetermined positional relationship, except when the specific display result is derived in the previous game. A configuration in which the relative positional relationship between the identification information in the variable display area is changed to a predetermined positional relationship when a special display result has been derived in the previous game by performing specific variation control for execution. Has been. That is, based on the premise that a special display result has been derived in the previous game, the predetermined effect is executed by changing the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas to the predetermined positional relationship during the delay period. Therefore, it is configured to notify that specific fluctuation control has been performed.

  As described above, by storing data for performing one variation control as the variation control for executing the predetermined effect, the specific variation for executing the predetermined effect during the delay period without increasing the storage capacity as much as possible. When the control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas is changed to a predetermined positional relationship at a high rate, and notification that the privilege is given is given by the display state of the variable display device Can do.

  Note that the derivation operation accepting unit accepts the operation if the derivation operation accepting unit is a unit that derives the display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination unit and the operation accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit. It is also possible to stop any of the symbols arranged within a predetermined retractable range with reference to the symbol that is variably displayed. In this case, the specific timing refers to a timing at which symbols arranged at positions including the specific symbols within the pullable range are variably displayed.

  Further, the specific prize constituting the specific result may be one type of prize or a plurality of kinds of prizes. The specific display result may be a winning display result that constitutes a specific winning that is allowed to occur. In addition, when the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted but the decision result is different from the specific result, the specific display result is specified when the winning display result constituting the specific winning is derived in the specific winning line among the plurality of winning lines. It may be a display result in which the winning display result constituting the winning is derived to a special winning line different from the specific winning line.

  Further, the specific game may be a game that is determined in advance before the timing at which the suggestive effect can be executed in the previous game, and is a predetermined game in a specific game state (for example, BB1, BB2, etc.). Alternatively, it may be a game that is randomly determined each time the game state is controlled to a specific gaming state.

  In addition, the specific display result and the special display result may be a display result constituted by symbols derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas, and some of the plurality of variable display areas are variable display areas. The display result may be composed of symbols derived from (for example, only the right reel 2R). Similarly, the specific display state may be a display state composed of symbols derived to each of the plurality of variable display regions, and a part of the variable display regions (a part of the variable display regions ( For example, the display state may be constituted by symbols derived to the right reel 2R only).

  Further, the privilege granting means only needs to grant a privilege on the condition that specific variation control is performed in which the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the variable display areas is a predetermined positional relationship. A privilege may be granted by performing variation control, or a privilege is imparted when specific variation control is performed and the display state of the variable display device becomes the specific display state during the delay period. It may be.

(10) In any one of the above-described (1) to (9), the predetermined effect is composed of a plurality of types of effects (effects based on pre-notification data, notification data, and post-notification data). And
The effect execution means changes the execution period of each of at least two or more effects among the multiple types of effects (the execution period of the effect based on each of the pre-notification data and post-notification data) according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. The predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached (FIGS. 34 and 35).

  According to such a configuration, by changing the execution period of each of the two or more effects constituting the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the execution period of the predetermined effect is changing, compared with the case where only the execution period of one effect constituting the predetermined effect is changed. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

(11) In any one of the above-described (1) to (10), the predetermined effect is added before or after the notification effect (the effect based on the notification data) for notifying predetermined information and the notification effect. Additional effects (effects based on pre-notification data and post-notification data),
The effect execution means changes the execution period of the additional effect according to the timing of starting the predetermined effect without changing the execution period of the notification effect regardless of the timing of starting the predetermined effect, The predetermined effect is executed until the specific timing is reached (see FIGS. 35B and 35C and FIG. 34B).

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined information is notified by the notification effect among the predetermined effects, the player can be focused on the notification effect rather than the additional effect. In addition, by changing the execution period of the additional effect according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is started without changing the execution period of the notification effect, the predetermined effect reaches the specific timing regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started. It is executed until For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the execution period of the predetermined effect has changed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(12) In any one of the above-described (1) to (11), privilege granting means (sub control unit 91) for granting a privilege (navigation stock acquisition, premier effect execution, set value suggestion effect execution, etc.) Prepared,
The effect executing means generates, as the predetermined effect, an effect (an effect based on a success pattern or a notice pattern) that causes the variable display device to derive an effect display result (a temporary stoppage) different from the display result. Means (for example, S06 to S13 in FIG. 18) to be executed in the period,
By performing an effect that causes the variable display device to derive a display result for specific effect (specific outcome) as the display result for the effect during the predetermined period, the privilege granting means informs that the privilege is granted. (FIG. 29 (g)),
By executing an effect that causes the variable display device to derive a display result for special effect (preliminary notice) as the display result for effect at a predetermined timing during the predetermined period, than when the effect is not executed, After the predetermined timing, the fact that the display ratio for the specific effect is derived is notified (FIG. 29 (i), FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, it is notified that a privilege is given by deriving a display result for specific effects during a predetermined period. In addition, it is notified that the display ratio for the specific effect is high when the display result for the special effect is derived in the predetermined period. For this reason, in the predetermined period, not only the display result for the specific effect is derived but also a sense of expectation for the display result for the special effect can be given. As a result, since the number of opportunities for expectation increases, the interest of the game during a predetermined period can be improved.

  The display result for presentation different from the display result may be different from the result that triggers the end of one game. For example, the display result is derived from the start of one game until the display result is derived. Alternatively, after the display result is derived, it may be derived until the next one game is started. The predetermined effect for causing the variable display device to display the effect display result is not limited to completely stopping the identification information and may be displayed while being finely swung (swaying up and down). Good.

  The ratio at which the display result for the specific effect is derived after the predetermined timing is high. The ratio that the determination means for determining whether to derive the display result for the specific effect derives the display result for the specific effect is high. It may be (first embodiment), and may be one (second embodiment) in which the number of derivations (frequency) derived from the display results for specific effects is increased. Moreover, the display result for the specific effect may be increased by deriving the display result for the specific effect (the embodiment). On the contrary, the display result for the specific effect is displayed. Even if the ratio of derivation is high (predetermined number of derivations or more is determined in advance), the display result for special effects is derived (refer to the [Lottery for notice pattern] column in the modification) Good.

  In addition, a privilege is a value (probability mode lottery, Navistock, etc.) that directly affects the ratio (medal payout rate) of the gaming value given to the player to the gaming value used for setting the number of bets, It does not directly affect the ratio of the gaming value given to the player to the gaming value used to set the bet amount, but is a value that is beneficial to the player in the progress of the game (suggested effect, finalized effect, (Refer to the “About Benefits” column in the modification).

(13) In any one of the above-described (1) to (12), a game control unit that includes the effect execution unit and periodically executes a timer interrupt process to control a game state ( Main control unit 41),
A stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) that rotates a display band in which the plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order in each of the plurality of variable display areas;
The timer interrupt process is
A steady rotation process (a process for performing a steady rotation) in which the display band is rotated in a steady manner by driving and controlling the stepping motor to display the variation of the identification information;
A non-steady rotation process (a process for performing a non-steady rotation) in which the display band is unsteadily rotated to display the variation of the identification information by driving and controlling the stepping motor;
Special processing with different processing periods executed according to predetermined conditions (LED dynamic display processing by main control unit 41, control signal output processing, command transmission processing, external output signal update processing, port input processing, origin passing processing And switch input determination processing, winning determination processing and payout processing),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect in the predetermined period by executing the unsteady rotation process before the special process is executed by the game control means in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, in the timer interrupt process, the unsteady rotation process for performing a predetermined effect by unsteadily rotating the display band is performed before the special process with a different processing period that is executed according to a predetermined condition. Since it is executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined performance from deteriorating without the display band having a predetermined unsteady rotation.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object part and determination value number regarding the special part and small part in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object combination and determination value number regarding the re-game player in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object combination and the number of determination values of RB in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object part and determination value number of RB in non-BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order promotion replays 1-6. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order maintenance replays 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order rush replays 1-4. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order melons 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any of weak strawberries 1-4, strong strawberries 1-4, weak grapes 1-4, and strong grapes 1-4. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a left melon or a middle right melon in RB in non-BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control in RB in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of a freeze related process. It is a figure for demonstrating the freeze generation determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for pattern lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the control data used only for the reel control during freezing. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on first time preparation data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on success A data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on failure data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of a timer interruption process (main). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of AT lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the AT lottery when AT lottery conditions are satisfied. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred by the navigation stock number lottery among AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a promotion effect, a freeze generation | occurrence | production effect, an operation effect, and a lottery result corresponding | compatible effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of the freeze related process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notice lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the success frequency lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart when control based on first time preparation data in 2nd Embodiment is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart when control based on success A data in 2nd Embodiment is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart when control based on failure data in 2nd Embodiment is performed. 10 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows the random number used when determining the change amount of each reel in the change amount determination lottery in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning range at the time of determining the change amount of each reel in the change amount determination lottery in the modification 1. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of each reel determined in the positional relationship determination lottery in the modification 1. FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Modification 2.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

  FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the internal structure of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel constituting the variable display device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the control circuit of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. That is, the see-through window 3 is configured so that three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on each reel can be visually recognized at the positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has “melon (for example, the pattern of the area number 20 of the left reel 2L)” and “banana (for example, the area number 19 of the left reel 2L), respectively. ”,“ White 7 (for example, the design of area number 18 on the left reel 2L) ”,“ Black BAR (for example, the design of area number 17 on the left reel 2L) ”,“ Star (for example, on the left reel 2L) "Region No. 14 symbol)", "Grapes (eg, left reel 2L, region No. 13 symbol)", "Black 7 (eg, left reel 2L, No. 10 symbol)", "White BAR (eg, left reel 2L) Reel 2L area number 6 symbol), "strawberry (for example, left reel 2L area number 5 symbol)", "star 7 (for example, left reel 2L area number 1 symbol)" Multiple types of diagrams There are drawn in a predetermined order, one by 21, respectively.

  The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout port 9 through which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) within the range. The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a specified number of bets determined according to the state, the medal stored as credits, and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (setting of credits and bets) The payout switch 10 that is operated when the game is started, the start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and the stop that is operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Switches 8L, 8C, 8R and a production switch 56 for use in production are provided so as to be operable by the player.

  In the present embodiment, “2” is determined as the specified number of bets according to the fact that the gaming state is a big bonus and a regular bonus (hereinafter also referred to as bonus), and the gaming state is a big bonus and a regular bonus. “3” is determined in accordance with a game state other than (hereinafter also referred to as a general game or a general game state).

  The front door 1b is provided with a game display unit 13 for notifying information related to the game. The game display unit 13 displays a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the replay of LED20 notifying is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. It has been.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later by a predetermined key operation and a reset operation for releasing a stop state described later is provided inside the front door 1b. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time while changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, which will be described later, and a stop state at the end of BB described later (the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A stop switch 36a for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function to be controlled, and automatic settlement processing at the end of BB described later (the medal stored as credit is settled regardless of the player's operation ( The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting whether the automatic settlement function to be controlled is to be enabled / disabled, and the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are arranged inside the housing 1a. The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the provided hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side or the medal payout outlet 9 side is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  Inside the casing 1a, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that can detect reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively (see FIG. 4). A reel unit 2 composed of a reel LED 55, an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a medal payout opening for medals stored in the hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at the time of startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state other than a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. In the mode, there are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned ON / OFF. It has been.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or credits are used to set the number of bets. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated.

  When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the corresponding lines of the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) become valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line set in advance to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the see-through window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, four types of pay lines L1 to L4 are defined as pay lines.

  The winning line L1 refers to a winning line set across symbols arranged in the middle of the reel 2L, the middle of the reel 2C, and the middle of the reel 2R, that is, the middle. The winning line L2 refers to a winning line set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. The winning line L3 refers to a winning line set across the symbols arranged in the upper part of the reel 2L, the middle part of the reel 2C, the lower part of the reel 2R, that is, the lower right. The winning line L4 is a winning line that is set across the symbols arranged in the lower part of the reel 2L, the middle part of the reel 2C, the upper part of the reel 2R, that is, the right side up. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L4, and may include, for example, a line straddling the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When a specified number of bets are set in the general gaming state other than the big bonus and the regular bonus, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. The game can be started. When a predetermined number of bets are set when the bonus is a big bonus and a regular bonus, the pay lines L2 to L4 are valid and the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1).

  If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game (in this embodiment, 12), and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the activated pay line, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. It has become.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  The game control board 40 includes a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, a settlement switch 10, a reset switch 23, a stop switch 36a, an automatic settlement switch 36b, an insertion medal sensor 31, and a door opening detection switch. 25, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and a payout sensor 34c, a full sensor 35a, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals of switches are input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes a credit indicator 11, a game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, an insertion request LED 17, a start valid LED 18, a waiting LED 19, a replaying LED 20, a BET switch valid LED 21, a left, middle The right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the above-described hopper motor 34b is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Detects a detection signal input from a random number circuit 42 that generates a random number, a pulse oscillator 43 that supplies a clock signal having a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 A switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays connected to the game control board 40, LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the drive of the LED, used for the slot machine 1 When the power supply voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command from power on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the main CPU 41a when no signal is input, and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected. Note that a command may be transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 without going through the effect relay board 80.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. In addition, an effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control part 91, and the sub control part 91 is based on a command from the main control part 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output are controlled. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED55 are illustrated as an effect device, an effect device is not restricted to these, For example, it drives mechanically. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. Switch detection circuit 96, time information including date information and time information The clock device 97 to output, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, other In response to a command transmitted from the game control board 40, the sub CPU 91a performs various controls for performing an effect, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the number of bets. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for determining the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 41c, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in the respective bits of the corresponding area of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormality error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all the data stored in the RAM 41c is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main sub CPU 91a, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 91c and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is only necessary to restore the state of the input port, and it is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the case where the production is interrupted in the middle to the state before the power interruption. For example, while backing up only data indicating the gaming state such as whether it is in the BB, the normal gaming state, or RT1 to RT4, an effect corresponding to the gaming state (if it is in the BB, the effect during the BB, the normal game) If a power outage occurs during the execution of a specific performance (such as a small role announcement) if it is in a state, it will not resume the specific performance that was being performed at the next power-on. Instead, an effect corresponding to the gaming state being backed up when the power is turned on may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay , SB) and a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games is stored when the game state is controlled to end. In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  When the mode is changed to the setting change mode (that is, when the setting change operation is performed), the gaming state flag is updated to information related to the normal gaming state described later in principle. Thus, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT or bonus, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the mode is changed to the setting change mode. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, when a transition is made to the setting change mode during the internal RT in which the bonus is won, the normal gaming state is controlled. In this way, in association with the setting change, the gaming state flag is rewritten to a value corresponding to the normal gaming state (initialization).

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bets. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

[Winnings, transition of gaming state]
FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the main control unit 41 has RT1 to RT4 in which the winning probability of the normal gaming state and the re-gamer is improved compared to the normal gaming state, and the internal RT, The bonus is controlled to either a big bonus or a regular bonus that improves the winning probability of a small role until a predetermined number of coins are paid out. In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 can control the effect state during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be performed. Yes.

  Referring to FIG. 5 (a), three types of big bonuses 1 to 3 (hereinafter, each big bonus is also referred to as BB) and regular bonuses (hereinafter, regular bonuses are designated as RB) Also referred to as).

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “star 7-star 7-star 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB3, the big bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled to the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of BB won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, while being controlled by the big bonus, the RB is controlled to the RB for BB which has been improved to the predetermined probability of the small role. The RB for BB is terminated on condition that any winning combination is won six times. While being controlled to RB for BB, a regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the game is controlled so that the regular bonus medium flag is set to the ON state for each game. Therefore, RB is controlled from the first game of BB, and even if RB is ended by winning six times, it is controlled again by RB when the next game is started (for example, when start switch 7 is operated). The game is started in the gaming state of RB.

  The big bonus generated due to winning of BB1 or BB2 ends on condition that 361 or more medals have been paid out. In addition, since the maximum payout number of one game is 15, 90 pieces are paid out by 1 unit (6 wins) RB. Therefore, in order to pay out 361 or more medals, the RB is controlled at least five times. The big bonus generated due to the winning of BB3 ends on condition that 241 or more medals have been paid out.

  The RB is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Star 7” or “Star 7-Star 7-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. When winning an RB, the regular bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled by the regular bonus, the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. The regular bonus generated due to the winning of the RB is terminated on the condition that any winning combination is won four times.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game state is controlled to the inside RT from when BB1 to BB3 and RB are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, after BB1 to BB3 and RB are finished, the gaming state is controlled by RT1.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win the winning combination, the winning combination is won. There is nothing. The symbols constituting “BB1” to “BB3” and “RB” (“black 7”, “white 7”, “star 7”) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Because. Note that when any of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, the winning flag of the bonus is carried over until the winning bonus is won.

  SB is awarded when a combination of “star-black 7-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning the SB, the winning combination of the small role (for example, melon 1) is controlled to a single bonus that is a gaming state in which the winning probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state. While controlled by the single bonus, the single bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. The single bonus generated due to the winning of SB ends when the game is played once.

  When the SB is won when the normal gaming state is controlled to any one of RT1 and RT3 and one game as a single bonus resulting from the winning is completed, the gaming state is controlled by RT2. On the other hand, after being controlled by RT4 and winning a SB, and one game as a single bonus resulting from the winning is completed, the control continues to RT4 before the SB winning. The single bonus ends in one game. For this reason, in FIG. 6, the single bonus is not shown, but when the SB is won while being controlled to one of the normal gaming state, RT1 and RT3, the single bonus is once controlled to RT2. When the SB is won while being controlled and controlled by RT4, it is once controlled to single bonus but again controlled by RT4. In the following, for the sake of convenience, each of RT2 and RT4 will be described as a gaming state that conceptually includes a single bonus due to SB winning, but in practice, after being controlled to a single bonus by SB winning as described above, It means that it is controlled to RT2 or RT4 according to the gaming state at the time of the SB winning.

  Even if SB is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will not win these roles. This is because the symbols (“star”, “black 7”) constituting the SB are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R.

  In a game where SB is won in the internal lottery, when the SB is not won, unlike the BB1 to BB3 and RB, the winning flag of the SB is deleted. In addition, when the SB is won in the internal lottery and the stop operation is not performed at the timing of winning the SB, and the symbol combination of the SB cannot be drawn on the winning line, the special outcome shown in FIG. The reel control is performed so as to be drawn into any of the lines L1 to L4.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combination includes a single combination, grape, melon 1 to melon 4, strawberry, and BAR cherry.

  One of the small roles is awarded when a combination of “star-black BAR-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out. Even if the winning combination is won, if the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing, no winning will be won. This is because the symbols (“star”, “black BAR”, and “black 7”) constituting a single winning combination are not arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R.

  Among the small roles, grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Even if the grapes are won, the grapes will not be won unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R.

  Of the small roles, melon 1 is awarded when a combination of “any-melon-any” or “melon-black BAR-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. For this reason, the melon 1 can be awarded regardless of the combination of the symbols of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R when the symbol “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped and displayed on the effective winning line. It can be said that it is a winning role.

  Melon 1 wins regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R if they are elected. This is because the symbols constituting the melon 1 (for example, “melon”) are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C.

  Next, melons 2 to 4 will be described. Melon 2 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−white 7−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Melon 3 wins when a combination of “white BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Melon 4 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, symbols constituting each of melons 2 to 4 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of melons 2 to 4 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, it will be won. Of the melons 2-4, you won't win the winning melon.

  However, as will be described later, melons 2 to 4 are always read out as a lottery winning combination at the same time as melon 1 except for the big bonus. For this reason, when the melons 2 to 4 are won, the melon 1 can be won except during the big bonus.

  Among the small roles, strawberry is one of the winning lines: “strawberry-white 7-banana”, “strawberry-black 7-banana”, “strawberry-star 7-banana”, and “strawberry-grape-banana” Wins when any combination is complete. Even if the strawberry is won, the strawberry will not win if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbol (“strawberry”) of the left reel 2L constituting the strawberry is not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L.

  When the player is in the general gaming state and is not controlled by the AT, the player can prevent the strawberry from being dropped by stopping the operation according to the operation procedure for winning the strawberry, and for example, from the symbol arrangement of the left reel 2L It is possible to prevent the SB from being controlled by RT2 by losing the SB without pulling in the “star” which is the left symbol constituting the SB.

  Next, the number of medals to be paid out when winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries will be described. When winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, medals are paid out according to the gaming state and the number of winning lines when the winning game is started.

  In the general game state, when a prize is awarded to any of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, when a prize different from grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries is won in a bonus different from the general gaming state, eight medals are paid out.

  The winning lines L1, L3, and L4 intersect at the middle stage of the middle reel 2C. Further, “any-melon-any” of melon 1 can be awarded only from the stop symbol of the middle reel 2C. Therefore, the melon 1 can be said to be a winning combination that can occur in a plurality of winning lines. For this reason, when the melon 1 wins melon 1 by stopping “any-melon-any”, the number of medals corresponding to the number of winning lines is paid out. For example, when the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped in the middle stage, in the general gaming state, the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 are won, so 4 × 3 = 12 medals are paid out and the bonus is won. Since winning is made on the lines L3 and L4, 8 × 2 = 16 and 12 medals at the upper limit of payout are paid out.

  Of the small roles, the BAR cherry is awarded when any combination of “black BAR-any-any” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Even if the BAR cherry is won, he will not win a prize unless the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbol (“black BAR”) of the left reel 2L constituting the BAR cherry is not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L.

  BAR cherries are subject to internal lottery only in RBs in BB and can be won. When winning a BAR cherry in RB during BB, 15 medals are paid out. Note that in a game state other than RB in the BB, even if the “black BAR” of the left reel 2L stops on any winning line, no BAR cherry winning occurs and no medal is paid out.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replay combination includes replay 1 to replay 11. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“banana”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 1 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. Since Replay 1 is a normal replay that does not involve RT transition even when winning, and maintains the current gaming state, it is also referred to as a normal rep in the following.

  Replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay 2 (“banana”, “melon”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the replay 2 in the normal gaming state, the RT3 is controlled to have a higher replay winning probability than the normal gaming state. For this reason, the replay 2 is also referred to as a promotion lip below. As will be described later, Replay 2 is set not to win in the internal lottery in RT1 or RT2, and is set to win in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability. For this reason, RT1 and RT2 do not win Replay 2. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled directly from RT1 or RT2 to RT3, and is controlled to RT3 by winning the replay 2 after being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  It should be noted that even when the game state is other than the normal game state (for example, RT1 or RT2), the replay 2 can be drawn and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). You may comprise so that it may be controlled by RT3 also from a game state.

  Replay 3 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-white 7” or “banana-banana-strawberry” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The left symbol and the middle symbol (“banana”) constituting the replay 3 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and the right symbol (“white 7” and “strawberry” constituting the replay 3 are arranged. ") Is arranged within 5 frames in the right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, the replay 3 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the replay 3 in RT3, the RT4 is controlled to RT4 in which the replay winning probability is further improved as compared to RT3. For this reason, the replay 3 is also referred to as a rush lip below. As will be described later, the replay 3 is set not to win in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2, and is set to win with a predetermined probability in the internal lottery in RT3. For this reason, the replay 3 is not won in the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2. As a result, it is configured not to be directly controlled by RT4 from the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2, and is configured to be controlled by RT4 by winning the replay 3 after being controlled by RT3. .

  It should be noted that even when the game state is other than RT3 (for example, normal game state, RT1, and RT2), the replay 3 can be selected and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). It may be configured to be controlled to the advantageous RT even from the gaming state.

  Once controlled to RT4, control to RT4 is maintained until 50 games are consumed unless a big bonus or regular bonus is won.

  Replay 4 is awarded when a combination of “melon-strawberry-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay 4 (“melon” and “strawberry”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 4 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. As shown in FIG. 6, when winning a replay 4 in RT3, it is controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, the replay 4 is also referred to as a falling lip below.

  Replay 5 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 6 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-white 7” or “black BAR-black BAR-strawberry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 7 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-white 7-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 8 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-banana-black BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Replay 9 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The replay 10 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 11 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Since the replay 5 is a set of three black BARs, the replay 5 is also referred to as a BAR lip. Further, each of the replays 6 to 11 has two black BARs, that is, the black BARs are in a tempered state, and are also referred to as tempile a to tempile f.

  The symbols constituting each of the replays 5 to 11 include symbols that are not arranged within five frames in at least one or more reels. For this reason, even if one of the replays 5 to 11 is won in the internal lottery, no prize is won unless the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at an appropriate timing.

  However, since the replays 5 to 11 are won simultaneously with other replays, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the symbols constituting any of the selected replays can be drawn into the winning line. it can. Therefore, in principle, the replays 5 to 11 may be unable to win even if they are won, but can be said to be a role that can win any replay.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. The special item is “melon-strawberry-banana”. In this embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 in the present embodiment is that the symbols constituting the SB are displayed on the winning line when the SB is won in any gaming state. This is performed when the SB is missed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after the special game stops in RT1 to RT3, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. Even if the special game is stopped in RT4, it is not controlled to the normal gaming state. Even if the special game is stopped in the normal game state, the control to the normal game state is maintained.

[Combinations of lottery roles]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, a combination of lottery object combinations and the number of determination values that are read out as a lottery object combination in the internal lottery will be described. In FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, “the name of the lottery subject” and the “combination of lottery subject” corresponding to the name are shown by the left two columns, and “gaming state” is indicated from the left third column. It is shown. The numerical value in the column where the lottery target role intersects with the gaming state indicates that the lottery target role is read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, and indicates the number of determination values used in the internal lottery of the lottery target role. 7 to 10, for example, the number of determination values when the setting value is 1 is shown as the number of determination values, but the number of determination values when the setting value is 2 to 6 is also stored in the ROM 41b so as to be specified. In addition, a cross in the column where the lottery target role and the gaming state intersect indicates that the lottery target role is not read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, or is not won even if read. .

  The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” in correspondence with a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “413” is set as the number of determination values (weak strawberry 1 in the normal gaming state in FIG. 7) is 413/65536.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, a plurality of winning combinations can be read simultaneously as lottery target combinations and can be won in duplicate. In the following, by indicating “+” between winning combinations, it indicates that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values regarding the special combination / small combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state and RT1 to RT4, weak strawberry 1, weak strawberry 2, weak strawberry 3, weak strawberry 4, strong strawberry 1, strong strawberry 2, strong strawberry 3, strong strawberry 4 Push order melon 1, Push order melon 2, Push order melon 3, Push order melon 4, Push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, 12 sheets melon 2, 12 sheets melon 3, 12 sheets melon 4, weak grapes 1, Weak grape 2, weak grape 3, weak grape 4, strong grape 1, strong grape 2, strong grape 3, strong grape 4, one piece 1, one piece 2, one piece 3, one piece 4, SB, RB, BB3, BB2, and BB1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as subject for internal lottery. As described above, each of RT2 and RT4 conceptually includes a single bonus. The numerical value in parentheses in the figure indicates the number of determination values in the single bonus in which the number of determination values different from RT2 or RT4 is set.

  Weak strawberry 1 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry. The weak strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + RB. The weak strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB3. The weak strawberry 4 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB2. The strong strawberry 1 is a lottery target role for reading out a strawberry + 1 sheet role. The strong strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet role + RB. The strong strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading strawberry + 1 sheet role + BB3. The strong strawberry 4 is a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  The push order melon 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 4. The push order melon 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3. The push order melon 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 2. The pushing order melon 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads out the melon 1. The pushing order melon 5 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4.

  The 12-sheet melon 1 means a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry. The 12-sheet melon 2 refers to a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + RB. The 12-sheet melon 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB3. The 12-sheet melon 4 is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB2.

  The weak grape 1 is a lottery target role for reading grapes. The weak grape 2 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + RB. The weak grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB3. The weak grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB2. The strong grape 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out the grape + 1 combination. The strong grape 2 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 + 1 combination + RB. The strong grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 combination + BB3. The strong grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  One-piece combination 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination. The one-piece combination 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination + RB. The single winning combination 3 is a lottery target winning combination that reads out the single winning combination + BB3. The one-piece combination 4 is a lottery target combination that reads out the one-piece combination + BB2.

  When the game state is RT inside, weak strawberry 1, strong strawberry 1, push order melon 1, push order melon 2, push order melon 3, push order melon 4, push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, weak grape 1, strong grape 1, and 1-sheet combination 1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targeted combinations for internal lottery.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values regarding the re-game combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, normal replay, push order promotion replay 1, push order promotion replay 2, push order promotion replay 3, push order promotion replay 4, push order promotion replay 5, push order promotion replay 6, The BAR temporary play 1, the BAR temporary play 2, the BAR temporary play 3, the BAR temporary play 4, and the BAR replay are the targets of the internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as the target roles of the internal lottery.

  The normal replay refers to a lottery target role for reading a normal lip. The push order promotion replay 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + templipe e. The push order promotion replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + entry lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip a + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 5 is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip b + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 6 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + promotion lip + templip lip c + temple lip e.

  The BAR temporary play 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e. The BAR temporary play 2 refers to a lottery target role for reading normal lip + templipa a + templipip b + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + RB. The BAR temporary play 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e + BB3. The BAR temporary play 4 is a lottery target combination for reading normal lip + templipa + tenpelipb + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + BB2. The BAR replay is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + BAR lip + templip lip a + templip lip b + templip lip c + temp lip d + temp lip e + temp lip f.

  When the gaming state is one of RT1, RT2, RT4, and internal RT, normal replay, BAR template play 1, BAR template play 2, BAR template play 3, BAR template play 4, and BAR replay are internal lotteries. It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. As described above, each of RT2 and RT4 conceptually includes a single bonus.

  When the gaming state is RT3, normal replay, push order maintenance replay 1, push order maintenance replay 2, push order maintenance replay 3, push order maintenance replay 4, push order maintenance replay 5, push order entry replay 1, push order entry Replay 2, Push Order Entry Replay 3, Push Order Entry Replay 4, BAR Temper Replay 1, BAR Temper Replay 2, BAR Temper Replay 3, BAR Temper Replay 4, and BAR Replay are subject to internal lottery and are subject to internal lottery. Read sequentially.

  The push order maintenance replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintenance replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templipa a + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e. The pushing order maintaining replay 5 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip b + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e.

  The push order rush replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads rush lip + falling lip. The push order rush replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templip b. The push order rush replay 3 is a lottery target combination that reads rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c. The push order rush replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templipa.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the RB lottery target combination and the number of determination values in BB. In the case of RB in BB, normal, special, and chance are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  “Normal” means a lottery target for reading BAR cherry + melon 1. Special means a lottery role for reading BAR cherry + melon 1 + strawberry. A chance means a lottery target role that reads BAR cherry + melon 1 + strawberry + melon 2.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the RB lottery target combination and the number of determination values in non-BB.

  When the gaming state is RB in a non-BB state, strawberry, left melon, middle right melon, 12-sheet melon 1, and strong grape 1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery. The left melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4. The middle right melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 2.

[Internal lottery]
Next, the internal lottery will be described in detail. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery is set so as to increase as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  Also, RB, BB2, and BB3 can be won at the same time as a small combination or a re-playing combination. For example, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger than in strawberry 1 to 4 than when winning in any one of weak strawberries 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, different reel control is performed when the weak strawberries 1 to 4 are won and when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are won, so the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  Moreover, when winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 is higher than in the case of winning in any one of weak grapes 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, since different reel control is performed when the weak grapes 1 to 4 are won and when the strong grapes 1 to 4 are won, the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  In addition, when winning strawberry or grape, the percentage of winning simultaneously for RB, BB2, and BB3 is better when winning strawberry than when winning vine. The number of determination values is set so as to increase.

  In the general gaming state, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is set to “2305”, and any one of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is 2305 × 5 / In order to win with a probability of 65536 = 111525/65536, the number of determination values is set so as to win with a higher probability than other lottery target roles.

  During the single bonus, for example, as indicated by the numerical value in parentheses, the number of determination values of the push order melon 1 is set to “2306” which is 1 larger than the normal gaming state. In this way, the winning combination probability of the small role is not improved significantly even if it is controlled to the single bonus by making the SB winning, but it is controlled to RT2 when the SB winning is made in any of the normal gaming state, RT1, RT3. Is done. For this reason, it can be said that the game progress is more advantageous for the player if the merit of winning the SB is small, but rather it is controlled to the normal gaming state where it can be missed and promoted to RT3 by the promotion lip winning. The number of determination values in the single bonus is not limited to that shown in FIG. 7, but may be set so that the winning probability of at least one small role is higher than that in the normal gaming state. That's fine.

  Next, paying attention to the number of determination values of the re-gamer in FIG. 8, the winning probabilities of the re-gamer are compared for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, “2734” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “1020” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is read. “98” as the number of determination values when “1” is read, “8” as the number of determination values when one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read, and “4” as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. "Is set. Therefore, the probability of winning any replay in the normal gaming state is 8980/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 that may be promoted to RT3 from the normal gaming state is 1020 × 6/65536 = 6120/65536.

  In RT1 and RT2, “8856” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, “98” is determined as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is selected. “8” is set as the number of determination values when read, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT1 or RT2 is 8982/65536. It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are set so as not to win a promotion lip or a rushing lip for shifting to RT3 or RT4.

  In RT3, “715” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “6586” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is read. “3500” as the number of determination values when any one of 4 is read, “98” as the number of determination values when BAR template play 1 is read, and any of BAR template plays 2 to 4 being read “8” is set as the number of determination values, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning any replay at RT3 is 47771/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 and the push order entry replays 1 to 4 that may be dropped from RT3 to the normal gaming state is (6586 × 5) + (3500 × 4) / 65536 = 46930/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order entry replays 1 to 4 that may be entered from RT3 to RT4 is 3500 × 4/65536 = 14000/65536.

  In RT4, “47836” is read as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is read as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values at that time, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read out. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT4 is 47962/65536.

  In the internal RT, “17000” is set as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values when read, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT4 is 17126/65536.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability that any one of the replays is won is set to be higher than that in the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2, when it is RT3, RT4, and internal RT. Has been. Therefore, it can be said that RT3, RT4, and internal RT are advantageous for the player in that the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2.

  Further, in RT3, although the winning probability of replay is high, the winning probability of falling lip is also high. Therefore, when not controlled by the AT described later, the RT3 is maintained, and the rushing lip is won and the RT4 is controlled. Is configured to be difficult. On the other hand, control of RT4 is maintained until 50 games are consumed. Therefore, it can be said that RT4 is an advantageous gaming state over RT3.

  In addition, when it is RT in the inside, it is set so that the winning probability of replay that is drawn preferentially over the bonus in the reel control is lower than that in the case of RT4 or the like, so that it is RT4. Compared with the case where the same replay winning probability is set, the ratio of winning the winning bonus can be increased.

  In the case of RB in BB, as shown in FIG. 9, the number of normal determination values is set to “59000”, and it is set to win with a high probability of 59000/65536. In addition, the number of judgment values for each special and chance is set to “3536” and “3000”. In other words, when the RB is in the BB in the present embodiment, one of the lottery target roles is always won in the internal lottery. Note that the number of determination values is not limited to this, and the number of determination values may be allocated so that a lottery that does not win any lottery target combination is generated with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%).

  In the present embodiment, the navigation stock described later is always given when the special is won, and when the chance is won, the occurrence probability of the freeze described later is improved and the possibility of the navigation stock is increased. For this reason, it can be said that both the special and the chance are lottery target roles that give a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

  In the case of RB in non-BB, as shown in FIG. 10, the number of determination values of the left melon and the middle right melon including melon 1 is set to “32604”, and each of the left melon and the middle right melon is 32604. It is set to win with a high probability of / 65536.

  When the winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combinations determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set.

  Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of the system. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is also 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel. Therefore, symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, for example, It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn is set when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing positioned in the lower window of the perspective window 3). That is, for each symbol corresponding to the reel area number, the stop control table pulls in when the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected when the symbol passes the stop reference position (lower stage). The number of frames can be specified.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. (For example, the lower symbol) is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred to, and the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames.

  Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel).

  That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as a strawberry) is won, or if a special role is won at the same time as a simultaneous winning role, the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn within the frame range is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range.

  That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  Next, in the case where a re-playing role is elected when the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won simultaneously, the winning re-playing role is placed on the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible in the range of four frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a plurality of types of re-game players are simultaneously won (for example, push order promotion replay 1), as shown in FIGS. Control is performed so that the determined re-playing combination is stopped on the winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In the present embodiment, among the three left reels 2L to 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop. Further, in the present embodiment, the forward pressing refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 2C for the second time after first stopping the left reel 2L. Further, the forward clamping push means an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 2R for the second time after the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time. The middle left push refers to an operation procedure in which the left reel 2L is secondly stopped after the middle reel 2C is first stopped. The middle right push refers to an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 2R for the second time after stopping the middle reel 2C for the first time. The reverse pinching push refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L for the second time after stopping the right reel 2R for the first time. The reverse pressing refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 2C for the second time after stopping the right reel 2R for the first time.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won.

  For example, when the push forward promotion replay 1 is elected, if it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the promoted rep in one of the winning lines in the winning replay. When the operation procedure is other than forward pressing, the normal lip combination is controlled so as to be aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  In addition, when the push order promotion replay 2 is won, if it is operated by the operation procedure that pushes forward, the combination of the promotion lip in the selected replay is stopped by aligning with any winning line. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal lip is aligned with any pay line and stopped.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order promotion replays 3 to 6 is won, the player is operated according to an operation procedure of a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order promotion replay selected. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the normal lip combination is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  As described above, different operation procedures are set for each type of push-order promotion replay selected as the operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and promoting it to RT3. For this reason, even if one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won in the normal gaming state, the promotion replies have a probability of only 1/6 unless the type of the push order promotion replay that has been won can be specified. Can be prevented from being controlled by RT3, and a normal lip is won with a probability of 5/6 and the normal gaming state is maintained. As a result, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the promotion lip so that it is not controlled to RT3 as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, the promotion lip is awarded and controlled to RT3. Can be controlled.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order maintaining replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of promoted lips in one of the winning lines in the selected replay is stopped. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  In addition, when the push order maintaining replay 2 is won, if it is operated by the operation procedure that pushes in order, the combination of the promoted rep in the selected replay is aligned with any winning line and stopped. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the combination of the falling lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order maintaining replays 3 to 5 is won, the player is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined in accordance with the type of the push order maintaining replay being won. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the combination of falling lip is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  In this way, as an operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and maintaining RT3, and an operation procedure for winning the fall lip and falling to the normal gaming state, for each type of push order maintenance replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. For this reason, in RT3, when one of the push order maintenance replays is won, unless the type of the push order maintenance replay that has been won can be specified, the promotion lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/5. RT3 cannot be maintained, and a fall lip is won with a probability of 4/5 to fall into the normal gaming state. Thus, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, even if it is controlled by RT3 fortunately, it is easy to win the fall lip and control is performed so that the RT3 is not maintained as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, It is possible to control so that the RT3 can be intentionally maintained by winning the promotion lip.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order entry replays 1 to 4 is won.

  For example, when the push forward rush replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the rush lip among the winning replays aligned with any winning line. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  In addition, when the push order rush replay 2 is won, if it is operated by an operation procedure that makes a squeeze push, the combination of the rush lip in the selected replay is aligned with any winning line and stopped. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the combination of the falling lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  Similarly, when the push order rush replay 3 or 4 is selected, if it is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order rush replay being won, , Control to stop the combination of rush lip aligned with any winning line, and if it is operated with an operation procedure other than the predetermined push order, stop the combination of falling lip aligned with any winning line To control.

  In this way, as the operation procedure for making the entry lip a prize and entering the RT 4 and the operation procedure for making the fall lip a prize and fall into the normal gaming state, for each type of the push order entry replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. For this reason, when one of the push order rush replays is won in RT3, unless the type of the push order rush replay that has been won can be specified, the rush lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/4. It is configured to fall into the normal gaming state by winning a fall lip with a probability of 3/4. As a result, when it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the entry lip so that it is not controlled to the RT4 as much as possible. When the control is performed by the AT while being controlled so as not to be maintained, it is possible to control the RT 4 so as to win the rush lip.

  Further, when any one of the BAR temporary plays 1 to 4 is won, the winning line L1 to L4 and the lower stage of the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R while winning any of the selected replays. That is, reel control is performed in which two “black BARs” are aligned on any one of the lower lines extending over the symbols arranged in the lower stage.

  In addition, when BAR replay is won, within the range of the number of frames that can be drawn, the “black BAR” is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L4 and reel control is performed to win the BAR lip, and the BAR lip is won. If it is not possible to win, one of the winning lines L1 to L4 and the lower line will be selected in the same manner as when one of the BAR templey replays 1 to 4 is won while winning one of the winning replays. The reel control is performed so that two “black BARs” are aligned together.

  Next, when multiple types of small roles are won simultaneously (such as a strawberry + 1-number role), the small role with a large number of payouts has a reel control that is drawn into the winning line preferentially over the small number with a small number of payouts. Done.

  As a case where a plurality of types of small roles are simultaneously elected, for example, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, as shown in FIG. Different reel control is performed according to the operation procedure.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of the pushing order melons 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order melon 1 is won, and if it is operated according to the operation procedure of the forward push, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4. When the operation procedure is other than forward pressing, control is performed to stop the “melon” of the reel to be stopped in response to the stop operation. That is, when the push order melon 1 is won and the operation is performed in the order of the push operation, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the three pay lines L1, L3, and L4. 12 is paid out, but when operated by an operation procedure other than forward pushing, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the pay line L2, so that only 4 medals are paid out. Also, when the push order melon 1 is won, and if it is operated according to the operation procedure of the forward push, the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages. On the other hand, when an operation procedure other than forward pressing is used, reel control is performed to stop the “melon” of the corresponding reel in the upper stage.

  In addition, when the push order melon 2 is won, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 when operated in the operation procedure of pushing forward. If the operation procedure is other than the forward pinching operation, control is performed to stop the “melon” of the reel to be stopped in response to the stop operation. In other words, when the push order melon 2 is won and operated by the operation procedure of pushing forward, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the three winning lines L1, L3, L4. When twelve medals are paid out, when operated by an operation procedure other than the forward push, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only at the winning line L2, so that four medals are paid out. stay. Further, when the push order melon 2 is elected, if it is operated by an operation procedure that pushes forward, the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is stopped at either the upper, middle, or lower level. On the other hand, when an operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is used, reel control is performed to stop the “melon” of the corresponding reel in the upper stage.

  Similarly, when any of the push order melons 3 to 5 is elected, when it is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order melon being won. Is a control that stops the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4, pays out 12 medals, and is operated in an operating procedure other than a predetermined pushing order. Controls the “melon” of the middle reel 2C to stop only on the pay line L2 and pays out four medals, and the “melon” of the reel to be stopped corresponding to the stop operation of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R. "Is stopped at the upper stage.

  As described above, as an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 and paying out 12 medals, Different operating procedures are set for each type. For this reason, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 can only be 1/5 of the probability unless the type of the push order melon being won can be specified. One cannot stop paying out 12 medals by stopping the symbol combination of “Mellon-Mellon-Mellon”, and the “Melon” on the middle reel 2C is stopped only on the winning line L2 with a probability of 4/5. Only 4 medals are paid out. As a result, when one of the pushing order melons 1 to 5 is won, only four medals are paid out as much as possible when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and intentionally won when controlled by the AT. It is possible to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any of the lines L1, L3, and L4, and control so that 12 medals are paid out.

  When one of the 12 melons 1 to 4 is selected, regardless of the operation procedure, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the three winning lines L1, L3, and L4, and the winning line L1, Reel control is performed in which the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped at either L3 or L4, and 12 medals are paid out.

  In FIG. 14, when operated in an operation procedure other than the pushing order for paying out 12 medals, it is only necessary to perform reel control for stopping “melon” in the upper stage for the middle reel 2 </ b> C. For example, the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R may be stopped at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages. This makes it impossible to specify whether or not the pushing order is correct and whether or not 12 medals are to be paid out from the stop positions of the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R. Interest can be improved.

  Next, the reel control when winning one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4, the strong strawberries 1 to 4, the weak grapes 1 to 4, and the strong grapes 1 to 4 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of weak strawberries 1 to 4, strong strawberries 1 to 4, weak grapes 1 to 4, and strong grapes 1 to 4 is won.

  For example, when any one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 or the weak grapes 1 to 4 is won, the combination of symbols constituting the winning strawberry or grape is selected within the winning line L2 Control to stop at any one of L4, that is, control to stop “strawberry” or “grape” at the upper or lower level as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 2L.

  On the other hand, when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 or the strong grapes 1 to 4 are won, the winning combination line L1 is stopped within the range of the number of drawn frames. Control, that is, control for stopping “strawberry” or “grape” in the middle as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 2L.

  As explained using FIG. 7, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 wins in any of the weak strawberries 1-4. The number of judgment values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set to be higher than when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are selected. When winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger grapes 1-4 than when winning any one of weak grapes 1-4 The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the one when one of them is won is higher.

  For this reason, when strawberry or grape has won a prize, the “strawberry” or “grape” on the left reel 2L is stopped at the middle stage, rather than when it is stopped at the upper or lower stage, RB, BB2 , And BB3 are highly elected at the same time, so the player's expectation can be improved.

  Moreover, as demonstrated using FIG. 7, when winning a strawberry or grape, the ratio which is simultaneously elected in either RB, BB2, and BB3 is more than when winning a grape, The number of judgment values is set so that it is higher when winning a strawberry.

  For this reason, even when “Strawberry” or “Grape” on the left reel 2L stops at the middle stage and wins a strawberry or grape, the one when winning the strawberry is RB, BB2, and BB3. Since the ratio of winning simultaneously to either is high, the player's expectation can be improved.

  Next, the reel control when one of the left melon and the middle right melon is won in the non-BB RB will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when the left melon or the middle right melon is won in the non-BB RB.

  For example, when the left melon is won and the left reel 2L is operated according to the operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L, the winning line L1, L3, or L4 has a “melon-melon-melon” When the symbol combination is stopped and the operation is performed in accordance with an operation procedure for first stopping other than the left reel 2L, control is performed to stop the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L2. That is, when the left melon is won and the left reel 2L is operated in the first stop procedure, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the two winning lines L3 and L4. 12 is paid out, but when operated in the operating procedure that stops the reels other than the left reel 2L for the first time, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the winning line L2, so that 8 medals are paid out. Stay on.

  If the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is operated in the first stopping procedure when the middle right melon is elected, any one of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 is set to “melon- When the symbol combination of “melon-melon” is stopped and the left reel 2L is operated in the first stopping procedure, control is performed to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L2. In other words, when the middle right melon is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is operated according to the operation procedure for first stopping, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C becomes the two winning lines L3 and L4. In order to stop, twelve medals are paid out, but when operated by the operation procedure of first stopping the left reel 2L, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the winning line L2, and thus the medal Will only be paid out.

  Thus, in the non-BB RB, as an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 and paying out 12 medals, Different operating procedures are set when you win the melon and when you win the middle right melon. For this reason, unless it is possible to specify whether the left melon is won or the middle right melon is won, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is placed on the winning line L1 only with a probability of 1/2. The medals cannot be paid out and 12 medals cannot be paid out, and the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the winning line L2 with a probability of 1/2 and only 8 medals are paid out. Yes. On the other hand, RB in non-BB is ended by winning four times. For this reason, according to the operation procedure in RB in non-BB, the net increase number in the said RB can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, reel control in the RB in the BB will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the reel control in the RB in the BB.

  For example, when the normal is won and the reel 2L is operated in the pushing order to stop the reel 2L before the middle reel 2C, the following reel control is performed. Note that the pressing order in which the left reel 2L is stopped before the middle reel 2C means forward pressing, forward pinching pressing, and reverse pinching pressing.

  For the left reel 2L, control is performed to stop “black BAR” on the winning line L4 within the range of the number of drawn frames, and “black BAR” cannot be stopped (cannot be pulled in) on the winning line L4. Is controlled to stop “melon” on the winning line L3.

  For the middle reel 2C, when the “black BAR” of the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line L4 according to the result of the already stopped left reel 2L, Within the range of the number of drawn frames, control is performed to stop “White 7” on the winning line L3. If “White 7” cannot be stopped on the winning line L3, “Mellon” is placed on the winning line L3. Control to stop. On the other hand, when the “black BAR” of the left reel 2L is not stopped on the winning line L4 and the BAR cherry non-winning is confirmed based on the result of the left reel 2L that has already stopped, it is within the range of the number of frames to be drawn. Then, control is performed to stop “melon” on the winning line L3.

  For the right reel 2R, control is performed to stop “White 7” on the winning line L3 within the range of the number of frames to be drawn. If “White 7” cannot be stopped on the winning line L3, “Melon” is selected. Is stopped on the winning line L3.

  Next, when the normal is elected, if the operation is made in the pushing order to stop the middle reel 2C first than the left reel 2L, “Melon” is won for each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Control to stop on line L3 is performed. Note that the pressing order in which the middle reel 2C is stopped before the left reel 2L refers to middle left push, middle right push, and reverse push.

  By performing such reel control, when the winning is normal, the “black BAR” of the timing for stopping “white 7” on the winning line before the middle reel 2C for the left reel 2L. On the condition that the white reel 2C and the right reel 2R are stopped at the timing to stop “White 7” on the winning line, the BAR cherry is won, and the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2L Reel control is performed in which “white 7” is tempered on the winning line L2 of the reel 2C and “white 7” is stopped on the winning line L3 of the right reel 2R. Of the timings for stopping “White 7” on the winning line for the left reel 2L, the timing for stopping “Black BAR” on the lower stage, and “White 7” for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are stopped on the winning line. The timing is also called a specific timing.

  On the other hand, when the left reel 2L is stopped earlier than the middle reel 2C, but the "black BAR" cannot be stopped at the timing to stop the "black BAR" at the lower stage among the timings to stop the "white 7" on the winning line Alternatively, if the left reel 2L is not stopped before the middle reel 2C, reel control is performed in which “melon” is aligned and stopped on the winning line L3.

  Next, when the special is won, if the left reel 2L is operated in the pushing order to stop before the middle reel 2C, the following reel control is performed.

  For the left reel 2L, control is performed to stop the “black BAR” on the winning line L4 within the range of the number of frames to be drawn. If the “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the winning line L4, the “melon” is controlled. Is stopped on the winning line L3.

  For the middle reel 2C, when it is determined to win a BAR cherry according to the result of the left reel 2L that has already stopped, “White 7” is placed on the winning line L3 within the range of the number of drawn frames. Control to stop is performed, and when “white 7” cannot be stopped on the winning line L3, control to stop “melon” on the winning line L3 is performed. On the other hand, when the BAR cherry non-winning is confirmed based on the result of the left reel 2L that has already stopped, control is performed to stop “melon” on the winning line L3 within the range of the number of drawn frames.

  The right reel 2R is controlled to stop the “black BAR” on the winning line L2 (“white 7” in the middle stage) within the range of the number of drawn frames, and stop the “black BAR” on the winning line L2. If it is impossible, control is performed to stop “White 7” on the winning line L3. If “White 7” cannot be stopped on the winning line L3, “Melon” is stopped on the winning line L2. Take control.

  When the special is won and the reel 2C is operated in the pushing order to stop the middle reel 2C first than the left reel 2L, the “melon” is placed on the winning line L3 for each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. The control for stopping the “melon” on the winning line L2 is performed for the right reel 2R.

  That is, when the special is won, the same reel control is performed for the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C as when the normal is won, and different reel control is performed for the right reel 2R than when the normal is won. Do.

  As a result of such reel control, when a special win is made, the BAR cherry is set on the condition that each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R is stopped at the same timing as the specific timing. In addition to winning a prize, three “white 7” s are aligned and stopped on the winning line L2, or “white 7” is tempered on the winning line L2 of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C and the winning line L3 of the right reel 2R Reel control for stopping “White 7” is performed. On the other hand, when the left reel 2L is stopped earlier than the middle reel 2C, but the "black BAR" cannot be stopped at the timing to stop the "black BAR" at the lower stage among the timings to stop the "white 7" on the winning line If the left reel 2L is not stopped before the middle reel 2C, the “melon” is won on the pay lines L3 and L4, and the “melon” on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is placed on the upper stage. The reel control is performed so that the “melon” stops on the V-shape.

  Next, reel control when a chance is won will be described. When the chance is won, the same reel control is performed for the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C as when the normal is won, and different reel control is performed for the right reel 2R than when the normal is won.

  For the right reel 2R when the left reel 2L is stopped before the middle reel 2C, control is performed to stop “White 7” on the winning line L3 within the range of the number of frames to be drawn. Is stopped on the winning line L3, control is performed to stop “melon” on the winning line L2. On the other hand, for the right reel 2R when the middle reel 2C is stopped before the left reel 2L, control is performed to stop “melon” on the winning line L2.

  By performing such reel control, when the chance is won, the BAR cherry is set on the condition that the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are stopped at the same timing as the specific timing. Reel control is performed so that “White 7” is tempered on the winning line L2 of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C and “White 7” is stopped on the winning line L3 of the right reel 2R. On the other hand, when the left reel 2L is stopped earlier than the middle reel 2C, but the "black BAR" cannot be stopped at the timing to stop the "black BAR" at the lower stage among the timings to stop the "white 7" on the winning line If the left reel 2L is not stopped before the middle reel 2C, the “melon” is won on the pay lines L3 and L4, and the “melon” on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is placed on the upper stage. The reel control is performed so that the “melon” stops on the V-shape.

  From the above, in the RB game during BB, with the high probability that the BAR cherry or melon 1 was won, the left reel 2L was stopped before the middle reel 2C, and the stop operation was performed at a specific timing. “WHITE 7 – WHITE 7 – BLACK BAR” or “WHITE 7 – WHITE 7 – WHITE 7” stopped on the winning line L1 and the middle reel 2C was stopped before the left reel 2L. On the condition that BAR cherry is missed, melon 1 is won and “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the winning line L3 or V.

[Processing by the main control unit 41]
Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first.

  In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When the processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7 to substantially change the game. BET processing for instructing the start is performed.

  If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. An internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery such as determining whether to perform or not is performed. In the internal lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag set in the RAM 41c according to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Further, in the internal lottery process, when one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won, a process for controlling to the internal medium RT (for example, setting the value of the internal medium RT flag to the value of the game state flag). Done.

  When the internal lottery process ends, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation processing, at the normal time on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game, Drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R in the order of left, middle and right, and starts to rotate in the order of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R It is assumed that it is in a valid acceptance state that effectively accepts the operation of. Rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in a normal manner is called steady rotation. On the other hand, as described later, rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in a manner different from the normal manner in the freeze period is referred to as unsteady rotation.

  Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R corresponding to the operated stop switches are stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. . The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with respect to an example in which the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switch. For example, whether or not the stop switch has been operated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the reel rotation. Regardless of this, the rotating reel may be forcibly stopped.

  In the reel rotation process, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is transmitted to the effect control board 90 when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Each time, a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to determine which reel has been stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether or not any role symbol corresponding to the gaming state is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. . If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed.

  In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of the winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that any one of BB1 to BB3 and RB has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag is set) Etc.) are performed.

  In addition, in the winning determination process in any of RT1, normal gaming state, and RT3, when it is determined that SB has been won, a process for controlling to RT2 (for example, the value of RT2 is set as the value of the gaming state flag) Etc.) are performed. Further, in the winning determination process in the normal gaming state, when it is determined that the promotion lip has been won, a process for controlling to RT3 (for example, setting the value of RT3 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT3, when it is determined that a winning lip is won, a process for controlling to RT4 (for example, setting the value of RT4 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT3, when it is determined that the fall lip has been won, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. .

  In addition, when it is determined that no winnings have occurred in RT1, RT2, and RT3 and the special outcome is stopped in any of the winning lines L1 to L4, it is for controlling to the normal gaming state. Processing (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9.

  Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90. When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus is performed as various processes not related to winning.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to RT1 (for example, setting the value of the RT1 flag as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  Also, in the payout process during RT4, the number of games digested during RT4 (including games controlled by SB winning and single bonus) is countably specified, and whether the number of games digested reaches 50 games. When it is determined whether or not 50 games have been reached, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  In the payout process, the game state of the next game (RT1 to RT4, whether it is a normal game state, internal RT, BB, non-BB RB, etc.) ) That can specify a game state command is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In the payout process, a winning flag (small winning combination, re-playing winning combination, SB winning flag) that is not carried over is also deleted, and the winning flag of the BB or RB bonus stored in the special work is not deleted. As a result, the bonus winning flag is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among RT1 to RT4, internal RT, the normal game state, and the bonus, and the progress of the game is indicated. In response, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Further, in the game control process executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment, a freeze-related process is performed to cause a freeze in the RB game during the BB and to execute a predetermined effect during the freeze. It is.

  The freeze is only required to delay the timing for enabling at least one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the target may be one stop switch, or two or more stops. It may be a switch. In the present embodiment, the freeze is generated by delaying the timing for enabling the operations of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R over a predetermined period.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a flowchart of freeze-related processing executed by the main control unit 41. Freeze-related processing is performed when the game is started by operating the start switch 7 during BB1 or BB2.

  First, in S01, it is determined whether or not the game is a specific game. The specific game is a game played at a predetermined timing in BB1 or BB2. More specifically, as the specific game in the present embodiment, for example, the fourth game of the RB is determined under the control of the fourth RB in BB1 or BB2. Even if the game is a specific game, as described later, when a special that is an opportunity to always give navigation stock in the previous game is won, it is determined NO in S01.

  In S02, freeze determination is performed. The determination of the occurrence of freeze is performed according to the distribution rate according to the winning situation in a predetermined period until the predetermined timing is reached. The predetermined period refers to, for example, the first to third RBs during BB1 or BB2 in which freeze-related processing is performed. The winning situation refers to, for example, a result of winning in an internal lottery.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining a freeze occurrence determination table used for freeze occurrence determination on the main control unit 41 side. In the freeze occurrence determination in this embodiment, the freeze occurrence is randomly generated using a random number or the like according to the allocation rate according to the winning situation in the first to third RBs with reference to the freeze occurrence determination table Decide whether or not to

  As the winning situation in the 1st to 3rd RBs, if the chance was won, it was decided that the freeze would occur at a rate of 95% and no freeze would occur at the rate of 5%. Decide on occurrence. As a winning situation in the first to third RBs, when a chance is not won, it is determined that freezing occurs at a rate of 55%, and no freezing occurs at a rate of 45%.

  When a chance is won in BB1 and BB2, a chance winning flag for specifying that a chance has been won is set in the RAM 41c, and is reset after being maintained until the BB ends. In the freeze-related processing, whether or not a chance is won is determined as the winning status in the first to third RB based on the chance winning flag.

  Returning to FIG. 18, in S03, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in S02 that a freeze has occurred. When it is determined that the occurrence of the freeze has been determined, the freeze is generated by the processing after S04. Freezing is continuously executed until it is determined as YES in S13 described later. Therefore, when a freeze occurs, the timing for enabling the operations of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed at least until the freeze related process is completed.

  When it is determined that the freeze has occurred, the initial preparation data is set, and a value corresponding to the initial preparation data is set in the freeze period counter for specifying the period to be controlled to freeze, based on the initial preparation data. Then, reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed. The value of the freeze period counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and updated as the game progresses. When the initial preparation data is set, for example, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the freeze period counter.

  The control based on the initial preparation data is executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and during that time, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, all the reels 2L to 2R are stopped at the same timing (each reel swings finely). Then, the control is performed in an operation reception period in which an operation to the start switch 7 is received when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the control based on the initial preparation data.

  The details of the control based on the initial preparation data will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. When an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the initial preparation data is terminated, another control data is set, and a value corresponding to the other control data is reset in the freeze period counter As a result, control based on the newly set control data is executed.

  In S05, a process for transmitting the initial command for specifying the timing controlled in the operation reception period to the sub-control unit 91 while specifying that the initial preparation data is set and the freeze occurs is performed. Do.

  When the sub-control unit 91 receives the initial command, it performs a freeze occurrence effect corresponding to the occurrence of the freeze. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs an operation effect for promoting the operation to the start switch 7 when the timing at which the operation reception period starts after receiving the initial command is reached.

  In S06, it is determined whether or not the control content based on the control data is an operation acceptance period. When it is determined that it is not the operation reception period, the process of S06 is repeated, and when it is determined that it is the operation reception period, the process proceeds to S07 and it is determined whether or not an operation to the start switch 7 has been received. .

  If it is determined in S07 that an operation to the start switch 7 has not been accepted, it is determined in S08 whether or not the operation acceptance period has ended and the value of the freeze period counter has reached zero. If it is not determined in S08 that the operation acceptance period has ended and the value of the freeze period counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to S07.

  When it is determined in S07 that the operation to the start switch 7 has been accepted, or in S08, when it is determined that the operation acceptance period has ended without accepting the operation and the value of the freeze period counter has reached 0, S09 , A notice pattern that can stop a specific notice that informs that the navigation stock will be given in the AT lottery that will be described later, or that the ratio of the success pattern is high can be stopped A pattern lottery is performed to determine whether a specific pattern and a noticed pattern cannot be stopped and whether the failure pattern ends the freeze.

  The pattern lottery is performed in accordance with the distribution ratio according to the winning situation in the predetermined period until the predetermined timing is reached and the stop situation of the notice notice. The predetermined period refers to the first to third RBs in BB1 or BB2 in which freeze-related processing is performed, for example, in the case where freeze occurrence is determined. Note that the predetermined period that affects the distribution ratio in the pattern lottery may be a period that is different from the period that affects the distribution ratio in the freeze occurrence determination.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a pattern lottery table used for pattern lottery on the main control unit 41 side. In the pattern lottery according to the present embodiment, a random number or the like is used in accordance with the distribution ratio according to the winning situation in the first to third RBs and the stoppage situation of the notice notice with reference to the pattern lottery table. A random lottery will be held.

  As the winning status in the 1st to 3rd RBs, when the chance is won, the success A control data of the success pattern control data is determined at a rate of 20%, and the success pattern control data at a rate of 20%. The success B data is determined as the advance notice A data in the control data of the advance notice pattern at a rate of 20%, and is determined as the advance notice B data in the control data of the advance notice pattern at a rate of 20%. Failure data that is control data of a failure pattern is determined at a rate of 20%.

  As a winning situation in the first to third RBs, when the chance is not won, the success A data of the control data of the success pattern is determined at a rate of 15%, and the success pattern is controlled at a rate of 15%. The data is determined as the success B data of the data, is determined as the notification A data of the control data of the notification pattern at a rate of 15%, and is determined as the notification B data of the control data of the notification pattern at a rate of 15%. The failure data that is the control data of the failure pattern is determined at a rate of 40%.

  Regardless of whether or not the chance was won, if the control data used to stop the previous outcome during the series of freeze periods was the notice A data, the success pattern control data at a rate of 30% The success B data is determined as the success B data of the control data of the success pattern at a rate of 35%, and is determined as the advance notice B data of the control data of the notification pattern at a rate of 20%. Failure data that is control data of a failure pattern is determined at a rate of 15%.

  Regardless of whether or not the chance was won, if the control data used to stop the previous outcome during the series of freeze periods was the notice B data, the control data of the success pattern at a rate of 40% The success data is determined to be success data B in the success pattern control data at a rate of 55%, and is determined to be failure data that is the failure pattern control data at a rate of 5%.

  In this way, the success pattern and the notice pattern are allocated at a higher rate when the chance is won than when the chance is not won in the first to third RBs. The rate is set. In addition, the distribution rate is set so that the success pattern is determined at a higher rate when the outcome based on the previous notice pattern is stopped than when the outcome based on the advance notice pattern is not stopped. ing. In addition, even when the outcome based on the advance notice pattern is stopped the previous time, when the outcome based on the advance notice B pattern is stopped, the outcome based on the advance notice A pattern is stopped. The distribution rate is set so that the success pattern is determined at a high rate.

  Returning to FIG. 18, in S10, the control based on the set control data is terminated, the control data corresponding to the result of the pattern lottery is set, and a value corresponding to the control data is newly set in the freeze period counter. The reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed based on the control data. That is, when an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the set control data is terminated, and when the success pattern is determined by lottery, control data corresponding to the success pattern is set. At the same time, the value corresponding to the control data is reset in the freeze period counter, and when the notice pattern is determined, the control data corresponding to the notice pattern is set and the value corresponding to the control data is set in the freeze period counter. If it is reset and determined as a failure pattern, control data corresponding to the failure pattern is set and a value corresponding to the control data is reset in the freeze period counter, and control based on the set control data is performed. Executed.

  When control data corresponding to a success pattern or a notice pattern is set, for example, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the freeze period counter. When control data corresponding to the failure pattern is set, a value corresponding to, for example, 3 seconds is set as the value of the freeze period counter.

  Control based on the control data corresponding to the success pattern is executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and during that time, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, all the reels 2L to 2R are stopped at the same timing (each reel is finely divided). Then, it is rotated and stopped again, and is controlled in an operation reception period in which an operation to the start switch 7 is received when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the control based on the control data.

  The control based on the control data corresponding to the notice pattern is executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and during that time, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, all the reels 2L to 2R are stopped at the same timing. Then, it is rotated and stopped again, and is controlled in an operation reception period in which an operation to the start switch 7 is received when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the control based on the control data.

  The control based on the control data (failure data) corresponding to the failure pattern is executed for a predetermined period (3 seconds). During that time, the reels 2L to 2R are finely shaken and then started to rotate to freeze. Is finished, and the routine shifts to normal reel control (steady rotation).

  The control contents based on the control data corresponding to each of the success pattern, the notice pattern, and the failure pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, FIG. 23, and FIG. When an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period in the success pattern, another control data is set, the control based on the preparation data corresponding to the success pattern is terminated, and the newly set control data (the lottery result) The control based on the pattern) is executed.

  In S <b> 11, a process for transmitting a frozen command for specifying the result of pattern lottery and the timing controlled during the operation acceptance period to the sub-control unit 91 is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the command during freezing, it performs an effect corresponding to the lottery result. Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs an operation effect for promoting the operation to the start switch 7 when the operation reception period starts after receiving the command during freezing that specifies the success pattern.

  In S12, it is determined whether or not control data corresponding to the success pattern or the notice pattern is set. When it is determined that the control data corresponding to the success pattern or the advance notice pattern is set, the process proceeds to S06 again, and the processes after S06 are executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither control data of the success pattern or the advance notice pattern is set, that is, when the control data of the failure pattern is set, the process proceeds to S13.

  In S13, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze period counter has reached zero. That is, it is determined whether the control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern has ended. S13 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern has ended. When it is determined that the control has ended, the freeze-related processing is ended. As a result, the freeze is terminated and the routine shifts to normal reel control (steady rotation).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S01 that the game is not a specific game, or if it is determined in S03 that the freeze has not been determined, the freeze-related process is terminated without performing the process for generating the freeze in S04 and thereafter.

  Next, control data used during freezing and control contents will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining control data used only for reel control during freezing.

  The types of control data include initial preparation data set in S04 in FIG. 18, success A data as success pattern, success B data, notice A data as notice pattern, notice B data set in S10 in FIG. , And failure data as failure patterns are provided. Further, the success A data and the success B data are respectively controlled to the preparation state for performing the control based on the success derivation data that can stop the specific outcome and the next control data, and the next preparation that is controlled during the operation reception period. Data. Further, the notice A data and the notice B data are respectively controlled to a preparation state for performing control based on the notice derivation data capable of stopping the notice notice and the next control data, and the next preparation to be controlled during the operation reception period. Data.

  Of these, initial preparation data, success A data (success derivation data, next preparation data), success B data (success derivation data, next preparation data), advance notice A data (announcement derivation data, next preparation data), and advance notice B data Each of the (notice derivation data and next preparation data) includes frame number data for specifying a symbol to be stopped after each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated. From the frame number data, it is possible to specify how many symbols ahead the symbol is stopped from the symbol stopped immediately before starting the control based on each control data.

  For the initial preparation data, “11” for the left reel 2L, “14” for the middle reel 2C, and “11” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. Thereby, for example, when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 as the stop pattern of the previous game immediately before the control based on the initial preparation data is started, the freeze is generated in the specific game. After the reels 2L to 2R are started and rotated, on the winning line L1, the area number 8 “melon” of the left reel 2L, the area number 11 “melon” of the middle reel 2C, and the area number 7 of the right reel 2R The “banana” is stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped. When “melon-melon-banana” is stopped on the winning line L1, “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped above the winning line L2.

  That is, when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and the first preparation data is used, the “melon- “Melon-banana” is stopped, and “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped above the winning line L2.

  Of the success A data, for the success derivation data, “2” for the left reel 2L, “2” for the middle reel 2C, and “2” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. Thus, for example, as a stop pattern immediately before starting the control based on the success derivation data among the success A data, the “melon” of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L and the area number 11 of the middle reel 2C are placed on the winning line L1. When “Mellon”, “Banana” in the area number 7 of the right reel 2R is stopped, that is, “Melon-Melon-Banana” is stopped, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and then left on the winning line L1. Reel 2L area number 10 “black 7”, middle reel 2C area number 13 “black 7”, right reel 2R area number 9 “black 7” are stopped, that is, “black 7− "Black 7-Black 7" will be stopped.

  For the next preparation data among the success A data, “19” is determined for the left reel 2L, “19” for the middle reel 2C, and “19” for the right reel 2R. As a result, the symbols that were stopped immediately before the control based on the success derivation data among the success A data are started are stopped. For example, when “melon-melon-banana” is stopped, control based on the success derivation data among the success A data is started, and “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1. When the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, the "melon" of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L, the "melon" of the area number 11 of the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are again placed on the pay line L1. The “banana” in the region number 7 is stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped.

  That is, when the start A 7 is operated and the success A data is used during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game, After “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1, it is rotated again, and “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on the winning line L1. The eyes “black 7-black 7-black 7” are stopped.

  Of the success B data, for the success derivation data, “10” for the left reel 2L, “7” for the middle reel 2C, and “9” for the right reel 2R are defined as the frame number data. As for the next preparation data among the success B data, “11” for the left reel 2L, “14” for the middle reel 2C, and “12” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. Thus, when the success B data is used by operating the start switch 7 during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. , “White 7-White 7-White 7”, which is a specific result on the winning line L1, is stopped and then rotated again, and “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on the winning line L1. “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped above L2.

  As for the notice derivation data of the notice A data, “2” for the left reel 2L, “1” for the middle reel 2C, and “2” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. Accordingly, for example, as a stop pattern immediately before starting control based on the notice derivation data among the notice A data, the “melon” of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L and the area number 11 of the middle reel 2C are placed on the winning line L1. When “Mellon”, “Banana” in the area number 7 of the right reel 2R is stopped, that is, “Melon-Melon-Banana” is stopped, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated and then left on the winning line L1. Stop “black 7” of area number 10 of reel 2L, “banana” of area number 12 of middle reel 2C, and “black 7” of area number 9 of right reel 2R, that is, “black 7-banana-black 7”. It stops, and “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped in the inverted V-shape which is the notice notice.

  As for the next preparation data of the notice A data, “19” for the left reel 2L, “20” for the middle reel 2C, and “19” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. As a result, the symbol that has been stopped immediately before the control based on the success derivation data in the notice A data is started is stopped. For example, when “melon-melon-banana” is stopped, control based on the notice derivation data of the notice A data is started, and “black 7-banana-black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1. When the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, the "melon" of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L, the "melon" of the area number 11 of the middle reel 2C, and the area of the right reel 2R are again placed on the pay line L1. The number 7 “banana” is stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped.

  That is, when the start switch 7 is operated and the notice A data is used during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game, “Black 7-Banana-Black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 and “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped in the reverse V-shape, which is the notice notice, and then rotated again to win the prize. “Melon-melon-banana” is stopped on the line L1, and “black 7-black 7-black 7”, which is a specific appearance, is stopped above the winning line L2.

  Regarding the success derivation data of the advance notice B data, “10” is determined for the left reel 2L, “8” for the middle reel 2C, and “9” for the right reel 2R as the frame number data. As for the next preparation data of the notice B data, “11” for the left reel 2L, “13” for the middle reel 2C, and “12” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. Thus, when the notice B data is used by operating the start switch 7 during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. , "White 7-Strawberry-White 7" is stopped on the winning line L1, and "White 7-White 7-White 7" is stopped at the V-shaped notice, and the winning line is rotated again. “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on L1, and “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped above the winning line L2.

  The first preparation data, the next preparation data of the success A data, the next preparation data of the success B data, the next preparation data of the notice A data, and the next preparation data of the notice B data are each based on the frame number data. After the 2R is rotated and stopped, data for controlling the operation reception period when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the control based on the data is included.

  The control data may be any control data that performs control to stop the symbol specified by the frame number data with reference to the stopped symbol, and the number of frames specified from the frame number data after starting rotation. Alternatively, the symbol specified by the frame number data may be stopped after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated a plurality of times after the rotation is started.

  On the other hand, the failure data includes data that causes the reels 2L to 2R to rotate and shift to normal reel control after the stopped reels are finely shaken. As a result, when the start switch 7 is operated during the freeze and the failure data is used, an effect is produced in which the stopped reel is vibrated by finely swinging. In this way, unlike the normal mode, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R using the initial preparation data, success data, notice data, and failure data is referred to as unsteady rotation.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the control based on the initial preparation data is executed. FIG. 22A shows a case where the start switch 7 is not operated during the operation reception period, and FIG. ) Indicates when the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period. In FIG. 22, the state of rotation / stop of the reels 2 </ b> L to 2 </ b> R and whether or not an operation can be accepted are shown from the top.

  First, with reference to FIG. 22A, a case where there is no operation on the start switch 7 during the operation reception period will be described. When the control based on the initial preparation data is started, the control specified by the frame number data is stopped after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

  When the predetermined timing at which a predetermined period (2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the control based on the initial preparation data after each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped, it is determined as YES in S06 of FIG. Then, it is controlled in an operation reception period for receiving an operation to the start switch 7 for a predetermined period (2.5 seconds), and the operation can be received. When an operation to the start switch 7 is not accepted during the operation acceptance period and the operation acceptance period ends (YES in S08 in FIG. 18), the control based on the initial preparation data ends, and the pattern lottery in S09 in FIG. Control based on the control data corresponding to the result is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22B, a case where the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period will be described. As described above, first, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the control specified by the frame number data is stopped, and the operation reception period is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter. Controlled and ready for operation. When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted during the operation acceptance period (YES in S07 in FIG. 18), the control based on the initial preparation data is terminated at that timing, and according to the result of the pattern lottery in S09 in FIG. The control data is set in S10 of FIG. 18, and control based on the control data is started.

  That is, initial preparation data that can be executed for 5 seconds is set at the start of the freeze, but when an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the initial preparation data is terminated at that timing, and the next control Control based on the data is started. That is, when an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the initial preparation data is truncated and shortened at that timing, and the control based on the next control data is newly set and started.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when control based on the success A data is executed as an example of the success data and the advance notice data. FIG. 23A shows the operation of the start switch 7 during the operation reception period. (B) shows the time when the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period. In FIG. 23, the state of rotation / stop of the reels 2L to 2R and the availability of operation reception are shown from the top.

  First, with reference to FIG. 23A, a case where there is no operation on the start switch 7 during the operation reception period will be described. When the control by the success A data is started, based on the success derivation data, the control specified by the frame number data is stopped after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). .

  Thereafter, based on the next preparation data of the success A data, control is performed to stop the symbol specified from the frame number data after rotating the reels 2L to 2R within a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds). When the predetermined timing at which a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the control based on the success A data is reached, it is determined as YES in S06 of FIG. 2 seconds) It is controlled in the operation reception period to be received, and the operation reception is possible. When an operation to the start switch 7 is not accepted during the operation acceptance period and the operation acceptance period ends (YES in S08 in FIG. 18), the control based on the success A data ends, and the pattern lottery in S09 in FIG. Control based on the control data corresponding to the result is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, a case where the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period will be described. As described above, first, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the control specified by the frame number data is stopped, and the operation reception period is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter. Controlled and ready for operation. When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted during the operation acceptance period (YES in S07 in FIG. 18), the control based on the success A data is terminated at that timing, and according to the result of the pattern lottery in S09 in FIG. The control data is set in S10 of FIG. 18, and control based on the control data is started.

  That is, the control based on the success A data can be executed for 5 seconds. However, when an operation is accepted in the operation acceptance period, the control based on the success A data is terminated at that timing, and based on the next control data. Control begins. That is, when an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the success A data is truncated and shortened at that timing, and the control based on the next control data is newly set and started.

  When the control based on the success B data is executed, the same control as that of the success A data is performed except that the frame number data different from the success A data is used and a different symbol is stopped. Also, when control based on the advance notice A data and the advance notice B data is executed, the same control as the success A data is performed except that the number of frames different from the success A data is used and a different symbol is stopped. Done.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when control based on failure data is executed. Note that FIG. 24 shows the state of rotation / stop of the reels 2L to 2R.

  When the control based on the failure data is started, the control is performed so that each of the stopped reels 2L to 2R is shaken finely for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the design is oscillated up and down. A production like this is performed. Thereafter, each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds), the initial position return control is performed, the initial position notification control is performed, and then the normal reel control is shifted to the steady rotation. Control for making it happen is performed.

  The initial position return control is a relative positional relationship between the reels so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game while maintaining the rotation of the reels. To control. In the slot machine 1, the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game is held in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c until the end of the next game, and the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. Thus, the initial positional relationship can be specified.

  The period for holding the stop position of each reel at the end of the game only needs to be held until at least the initial position return control is performed, and may not be held thereafter. Further, the stop position of each reel of the previous game may be held only at the end of the previous game (previous game) of the specific game in which the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed.

  The initial position notification control is a control for notifying that the relative positional relationship between the reels is the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game. Say. As a mode of notification, lighting control of the reel LED 55 in a specific mode may be performed. The initial position return control and the initial position notification control are completed within a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) from when the reels 2L to 2R are rotated by the control based on the failure data to the end. After the initial position notification control, as shown in FIG. 24, the operation is shifted to the constant speed rotation, and at this time, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  In the initial position return control in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the initial positional relationship while maintaining the reel rotation. However, the initial position return control is not limited to the one that maintains the reel rotation. Instead, the reels may be temporarily stopped after the relative positional relationship between the reels is set as the initial positional relationship. In this case, by temporarily stopping each reel at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game, it is possible to return to the stop position at the end of the previous game and then shift to steady rotation. Good. In addition, by temporarily stopping each reel at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game, a notification that the relative positional relationship between the reels has become the initial positional relationship, The initial position notification control may also be performed by the initial position return control.

  Control data used during freezing is stored in the ROM 41b on the main control unit 41 side. Further, the control data (first preparation data, success derivation of success data, next preparation of success data, derivation of advance notice data, next preparation of advance notice data) to stop after rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R is frame number data. Are stored only one by one. That is, data for repeatedly stopping “black 7-black 7-black 7” and “white 7-white 7-white 7”, which are specific outcomes during freeze, on the winning line L1, or a preliminary announcement outcome. Since there is little data for repeatedly stopping the reverse V-shaped “black 7-black 7-black 7” and the V-shaped “white 7-white 7-white 7”, it is not necessary to increase the storage capacity in the ROM 41b.

  Even if only one type of frame number data is stored for each control data, “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 at a high rate in the previous game as will be described later. Therefore, when success data is set during the freeze, “black 7-black 7-black 7” and “white 7-white 7-white 7” are stopped on the winning line L1 at a high rate, and a notice is given. When the data is set, “black 7-black 7-black 7” can be stopped in a reverse V-shape and “white 7-white 7-white 7” can be stopped in a V-shape at a high rate.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main CPU 41a interrupting and executing the game control process at regular time intervals in response to the occurrence of an interrupt.

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Si1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Si2).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed. If the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed, a motor step process of Si8 described later is performed. The motor phase signal output process is executed to output the phase signal data changed in step S5 and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Si23 described later (Si5).

  Next, a reel start process (Si7) for controlling the step time interval when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, a motor step process (Si8) for changing the phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel After the motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped, motor phase signal standby processing (Si9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain period of time is sequentially executed.

  In addition, LED dynamic display processing (Si10) for dynamically lighting various displays, output processing for control signals (Si11) for outputting data such as lighting signals for various LEDs to an output port, and random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Si12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Si13), command transmission processing for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 (Si14), and external output for updating external output signals The signal update process (Si15) is sequentially executed.

  Also, port input processing (Si17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, checking the origin passing (passing the reel reference position) of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and generating a reel rotation error Detects and confirms whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set). If stop preparation is completed and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, it corresponds to the rotating reel. A process at the time of passing through the origin permitting the activation of the operation of the stop switch (Si18), a switch input determination process (Si19) for determining whether or not these various switches satisfy the detection condition based on detection signals of the various switches, Are executed sequentially.

  Further, when it is determined that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are detected, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position, and the stop switch process (Si22) for calculating the number of steps after which the stop should be stopped The calculated number of steps until the stop is counted. When it is time to stop, stop processing (Si23) for starting braking by two-phase excitation, and three-phase excitation is performed after a certain time from the start of braking in the stopping processing. After the final stop process (Si24) is sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Si2 is restored (Si20), the interrupt prohibited in the Si1 step is permitted (Si21), and the process before the interrupt is returned. .

  Reel effects performed by rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R unsteadily during the freeze period described above with reference to the freeze-related processing include motor phase signal output processing (Si5) and reel start processing (Si7) in timer interrupt processing. The motor step process (Si8) and the motor phase signal standby process (Si9) are sequentially executed. In this embodiment, the motor phase signal output process (Si5), the reel start process (Si7), the motor step process (Si8), and the motor phase signal standby process (Si9) are performed in accordance with conditions such as the gaming state. Are executed before a process (special process) having different execution status or execution period (generally referred to as a process period). Here, special processing includes LED dynamic display processing (Si10), control signal output processing (Si11), command transmission processing (Si14), external output signal update processing (Si15), port input processing (Si17), origin Examples of the process include an on-pass process (Si18), a switch input determination process (Si19), and the like, and may be a single process or a process realized by combining a plurality of these processes.

  Specifically, in the LED dynamic display process (Si10), the processing period varies depending on whether any of the various displays is dynamically lit, the lighting time, the lighting timing, or the like. In the control signal output processing (Si11), the processing period varies depending on whether or not there is an output to the output port. Furthermore, in the command transmission process (Si14), the processing period varies depending on the presence / absence of command transmission, transmission timing, and the like. In the external output signal update process (Si15), the processing period varies depending on whether or not the external output signal is updated and the update timing. Further, in the port input process (Si17), the processing period varies depending on which detection data of various switches is input, input timing, and the like. Also, in the origin passing process (Si18), whether or not the rotating reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have passed the origin, whether or not a reel rotation error has been detected, and whether or not the stop preparation has been completed. The processing period varies depending on whether or not the constant speed rotation is being performed, and which operation of any stop switch is enabled. Further, in the switch input determination process (Si19), the processing period varies depending on the presence / absence and detection timing of detection signals of various switches, whether or not various switches satisfy the detection conditions, and the like.

  A motor phase signal output process (Si5) that realizes a reel effect during a freeze period, a reel start process, after a special process with a different process period such as presence / absence of execution or execution period depending on conditions such as a gaming state When (Si7), motor step processing (Si8), and motor phase signal standby processing (Si9) are executed, there is a possibility that the unsteady rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R may not be performed according to the control pattern due to the influence of the special processing. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process, a process for realizing the reel effect during the freeze period (unsteady rotation process) before the special process having a different process period executed according to a predetermined condition. By executing the above, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate unsteadily without being affected by special processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from being in a predetermined unsteady rotation under the influence of a special process that is executed in accordance with a predetermined condition. It is possible to prevent the interest of the production from deteriorating. Specifically, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R do not rotate in a predetermined non-steady state, so that the player may mistakenly recognize that another reel effect has been performed, or even recognize that it is not a reel effect. The situation can be prevented.

  In addition, the steady rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that realizes the symbol fluctuation display during the period other than the freeze period also includes motor phase signal output processing (Si5), reel start processing (Si7), and motor step processing (Si8) in timer interrupt processing. ), And motor phase signal standby processing (Si9). For this reason, not only the unsteady rotation process during the freeze period, but also the process (steady rotation process) for displaying the variation of the identification information by rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in a steady state other than the freeze period is performed before the special process. As a result, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be prevented from rotating in an irregular manner without causing a steady rotation to give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the present embodiment, the game control process is described as a process performed separately from the timer interrupt process. However, all or a part of the game control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In this case, the winning determination process and the payout process in the game control process correspond to the special process described above, and in the winning determination process, depending on the determination result of whether any winning symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line, etc. In the payout process, the processing period varies depending on the presence / absence of a medal, the payout period, the payout timing, and the like. For this reason, in the timer interrupt process, the motor phase signal output process (Si5), the reel start process (Si7), the motor step process (Si8), the motor phase signal standby process (before the winning determination process and the payout process ( Si9) may be executed.

[Processing by sub-control unit 91]
Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done.

  Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining a symbol stopped as a display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, an array specifying table for specifying the symbol array in each reel of FIG. Referring to the specific table, stop symbol specifying processing for specifying a symbol stopped on the corresponding reel from information included in the reel stop command is performed, and the specified symbol is registered in the stop symbol table. Thereby, the symbol stopped as a display result can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub control unit 91 performs an AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the game state and the like, and a game effect and a navigation effect according to the game state and the like. A game effect execution process for execution is performed.

[AT lottery processing]
The sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing an AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the AT lottery process, it is determined based on a command from the main control unit 41 whether or not a predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied, and when the AT lottery is satisfied, the AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery includes a navigation grant lottery that determines whether or not the number of navigation stocks is given, and a navigation stock lottery that decides the number of navigation stocks to be given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the game is controlled by the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an example of an AT lottery condition that triggers execution of AT lottery. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an example of the AT lottery when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table referred to in the navigation stock number lottery in the AT lottery.

  As the AT lottery conditions, first to ninth conditions are set as shown in FIG. The first AT lottery condition is that when the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal RT, the special line is stopped in any of the winning lines L1 to L4, the single winning combination, or “Melon” in the winning line L1. It is established by any one of the melon winnings due to the stop of the symbol combination “-melon-melon”. When the first AT lottery condition is satisfied, a navigation grant lottery is performed as an AT lottery.

  Note that the first AT lottery condition may be satisfied by stopping special appearance, winning a single winning combination, winning an SB, or winning a single winning combination. In addition, the first AT lottery condition may be established by winning one of the 12 melons 1 to 4 that triggers the “melon” of the middle reel 2C to be stopped in the middle stage.

  The navigation grant lottery is performed according to the winning probability corresponding to the probability mode controlled by the sub-control unit 91. The probability mode refers to a mode for specifying the probability of determining that the number of navigation stocks is to be given in the navigation grant lottery. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode with a high winning probability is controlled for 50 games after the BB1 is completed from among the bonuses. In addition, when the condition described later is satisfied in the normal mode, a probability mode lottery for randomly determining whether or not to control the high probability mode using a random number or the like is performed. When it is determined to control to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is controlled for 30 games thereafter. After the high probability mode ends, the normal mode having a lower probability of winning than the high probability mode is controlled. The sub-control unit 91 controls either the high probability mode or the normal mode according to the establishment condition by performing a predetermined mode setting process.

  When a bonus is won when the probability mode is in the high probability mode, regardless of the number of games that have been consumed in the high probability mode and the type of bonus that has been won, the bonus is won for 50 games after the bonus is over. Controlled to probability mode.

  Referring to FIG. 27, in the navigation grant lottery when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied, the probability mode is 1% when the normal mode is set, and the probability is 20% when the high probability mode is set. It will be decided to give the number of navigation stock at. The navigation grant lottery is randomly determined according to the set probability using, for example, a random number.

  The second AT lottery condition is that when the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal RT, the symbol combination of grape or strawberry stops on any of the winning lines L2 to L4 and the grape or strawberry wins To establish. The second AT lottery condition may be established by winning one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the weak grapes 1 to 4. When the second AT lottery condition is satisfied, a navigation grant lottery is performed as an AT lottery. In the navigation grant lottery when the second AT lottery condition is satisfied, the number of navigation stocks is calculated with a probability of 1.5% when the probability mode is the normal mode and with a probability of 40% when the probability mode is the high probability mode. It is decided to grant.

  The third AT lottery condition is that, when the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal RT, the symbol combination of grape or strawberry stops on the winning line L1 and the grape or strawberry wins, or the winning lines L1 to L1 This is established when two “black BARs” are aligned in either L4 or the lower line and the BAR lip is tempered. The third AT lottery condition may be established by winning one of the strong strawberries 1 to 4, the strong grapes 1 to 4, and the BAR temporary play 1 to 4. When the third AT lottery condition is satisfied, a navigation grant lottery is performed as an AT lottery. In the navigation grant lottery when the third AT lottery condition is satisfied, the number of navigation stocks is given with a probability of 3% when the probability mode is the normal mode and with a probability of 60% when the probability mode is the high probability mode. It is determined.

  The fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied when the symbol combination of the BAR lip is stopped and winning is awarded in any of the winning lines L1 to L4. Note that the fourth AT lottery condition may be satisfied by winning BAR replay. When the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation stock number is given with a probability of 100% without performing the navigation grant lottery as the AT lottery.

  When one of the first to third AT lottery conditions is satisfied and the winning is made by the navigation grant lottery, and when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the first navigation stock determination shown in FIG. A lottery for the number of navigation stocks will be made with reference to the table.

  When the first navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. 28A is referred to, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 85%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 2 at a rate of 10%. Navi stock number lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the rate of.

  In the table of FIG. 28 (a), the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 1.2 (= 1 × 85% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 10% + 3 × 5%).

  In the present embodiment, an example in which a lottery for lots of navigation stock is performed using the common table shown in FIG. 28A regardless of which of the first to fourth AT lottery conditions is satisfied has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of tables having different expected values of the number of navigation stocks to be provided are provided, and a table that is predetermined according to which of the first to fourth AT lottery conditions is satisfied is used. The navigation stock number lottery may be performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 specifies, for example, whether the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal medium RT based on the internal winning command or the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, the reel stop command, Whether or not the first to fourth conditions are satisfied is specified based on the winning determination command.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the fifth AT lottery condition is satisfied by winning a bonus when the gaming state is the internal RT. Note that the fifth AT lottery condition may be satisfied by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus when the gaming state is other than the inside RT. When the fifth AT lottery condition is satisfied, a navigation grant lottery is performed as an AT lottery. In the navigation grant lottery when the fifth AT lottery condition is satisfied, it is determined that the navigation stock number is given with a probability of 30% regardless of whether the probability mode is the normal mode or the high probability mode.

  When it is determined in the navigation grant lottery that the navigation stock is to be given, the navigation stock number lottery is performed with reference to the second navigation stock determination table shown in FIG.

  For example, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the internal RT is based on the internal winning command or the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and determines that the bonus is won based on the gaming state command or the winning determination command. Identify.

  When the second navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. 28 (b) is referred to, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%. The navigation stock number lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at the rate of 5 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at the rate of 20%.

  In the table of FIG. 28 (b), the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 2.5 (= 1 × 30% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 30% + 3 × 20% + 5 × 20%).

  Returning to FIG. 26, the sixth AT lottery condition is satisfied by determining the success A data as the control data during freezing when the gaming state is RB during BB. Note that the sixth AT lottery condition is that when the gaming state is RB in BB, it is stopped on the winning line L1 only when the control based on the success A data is executed as the control data during freezing. It may be established by stopping “7-Black 7-Black 7”.

  When the sixth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation grant lottery is not performed as the AT lottery, and the navigation stock number is determined with reference to the second navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. Is granted.

  The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the sixth AT lottery condition is satisfied based on, for example, a command from the main control unit 41 (for example, a command during freeze).

  Returning to FIG. 26, the seventh AT lottery condition is satisfied when the special B is won or the successful B data is determined as the control data during freezing when the gaming state is RB during BB.

  The seventh AT lottery condition is “white 7-white 7-white 7” which is stopped on the winning line L1 only when the game state is RB in the BB and the special is won. It may be established by being stopped. In this case, when the promotion effect is executed, the player tries to stop “White 7-White 7-White 7”. As a result, when the special winning is not performed in the previous game, the winning line The ratio at which “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on L1 can be further increased. Further, the seventh AT lottery condition is that “white 7-white 7-white 7” which is stopped on the winning line L1 only when the control by the success B data is executed as the control data during the freeze is stopped. It may be established by this.

  When the seventh AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation stock number is given with a probability of 100% without performing the navigation grant lottery as the AT lottery. That is, the lottery for the number of navigation stocks is determined with reference to the third navigation stock determination table shown in FIG.

  The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the seventh AT lottery condition is satisfied based on, for example, a command from the main control unit 41 (for example, an internal winning command, a reel stop command, a frozen command, etc.). To do.

  When the third navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. 28 (c) is referred to, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 25%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 2 at a rate of 25%. The navigation stock number lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the rate of 5 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at the rate of 25%.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 28C, the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 2.75 (= 1 × 25% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 25% + 3 × 25% + 5 × 25%).

  Returning to FIG. 26, the eighth AT lottery condition is that, when the gaming state is RB in the non-BB state, a medal is awarded in any of the winning lines L1 to L4 when a grape is won, or a left melon or a middle right melon is won. It is established by paying out 12 sheets. Note that the eighth AT lottery condition may be satisfied by winning the strong grape 1 when the gaming state is RB in the non-BB state. Further, the ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied when 48 RBs are paid out and the RB ends when the gaming state is RB in non-BB.

  When the eighth or ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation stock number is given with a probability of 100% without performing the navigation grant lottery as the AT lottery.

  When the eighth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation stock number lottery is performed with reference to the fourth navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. When the ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the navigation stock number lottery is performed with reference to the fifth navigation stock determination table shown in FIG.

  When the fourth navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. 28 (d) is referred to, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 80%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 2 at a rate of 10%. Navi stock number lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the rate of.

  In the table of FIG. 28D, the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 1.3 (= 1 × 80% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 10% + 3 × 10%).

  In addition, the average number of times that the eighth AT lottery condition is satisfied during one control to the regular bonus takes into account the low probability of winning grapes and the high probability of winning left melon and middle right melon. Focusing on the left melon and middle right melon, (the winning probability of left melon and middle right melon) × (probability that can be operated in the procedure of paying out 12 sheets), it becomes 32604/65536, in the RB that ends with 4 wins It can be said that it is about twice.

  For this reason, the total number of average navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired when the eighth AT lottery condition is satisfied during one control of the regular bonus is 1.3 × 2≈2.6. .

  When the fifth navigation stock determination table shown in FIG. 28 (e) is referred to, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 44%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%. The number of navigation stocks is determined so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the rate of 5%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at the rate of 5%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 7 at the rate of 1%. .

  Further, in the table of FIG. 28 (e), the number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 1.96 (= 1 × 44% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 30% + 3 × 20% + 5 × 5% + 7 × 1%).

  In addition, the average number of times that the ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied during one control to the regular bonus is four consecutive times because the probability that the eighth AT lottery condition is satisfied is approximately ½. The probability becomes the fourth power of (1/2), and it can be said that about 1 / 16≈0.0625 times.

  Therefore, the total average navigation stock number that can be expected to be obtained when the ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied during one control to the regular bonus is 1.96 × 0.0625≈0.12. It becomes.

  In the navigation stock number lottery in the AT lottery of the present embodiment, the maximum number of navigation stocks that can be acquired by one lottery is set to seven. The decision to set the maximum number of navigation stocks in the navigation stock number lottery is called maximum decision. Hereinafter, the AT lottery condition that can be determined to the maximum is also referred to as the maximum allowable AT lottery condition, and the AT lottery condition that cannot be determined to the maximum is also referred to as the maximum impossible AT lottery condition.

  Among the AT lottery conditions shown in FIG. 26, in the navigation stock number lottery in the AT lottery when the ninth AT lottery condition is satisfied, 7 can be determined as the maximum navigation stock number. For this reason, the ninth AT lottery condition is the maximum allowable AT lottery condition. On the other hand, among the AT lottery conditions shown in FIG. 26, the first to eighth AT lottery conditions are the maximum number of navigation stocks 7 as shown in the tables of FIGS. 28 (a) to (d). This is the maximum impossible AT lottery condition.

  When the sub-control unit 91 determines the maximum in the navigation stock number lottery, a maximum determination time counter for enabling the maximum determination to be specified until it is controlled by the predetermined number of navigation stocks AT, The data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 can specify that the maximum determination is made based on the value of the maximum determination counter.

  In the present embodiment, for example, 7 is set as the value of the maximum determination counter when the maximum number of navigation stocks is obtained by one navigation stock number lottery. The maximum determination time counter is decremented by 1 when determining the incubation period from the end of the AT corresponding to the consumption of Navistock 1 until the new consumption of Navistock and the control by the AT being possible. When the maximum value is determined, it is possible to specify that the maximum value is determined while the control is performed by the AT by consuming seven navigation stocks. When the maximum determination time counter value is set to a value larger than 0, and further maximum determination is performed, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding 7 corresponding to the maximum determination. Note that whether or not the maximum decision has been made is determined based on whether or not the maximum decision is made based on the value of the maximum decision counter. You may make it determine.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the AT lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the AT lottery condition is satisfied, the AT lottery is performed.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the AT lottery, the sub control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating the AT and the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks. When the AT flag indicating AT is set, it is possible to control the AT by consuming one navigation stock number.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired when the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag.

  For example, when the AT lottery is performed when the AT flag indicating that the AT is set, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the AT lottery is updated. To update to the AT flag corresponding to the result of the AT lottery, for example, add the number of navigation stock corresponding to the result of the current AT lottery to the number of navigation stock specified from the AT flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The number of navigation stocks may be rewritten to an AT flag for specifying the number of navigation stocks, and any method may be used as long as the current AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery can be specified.

  In the present embodiment, the AT is controlled according to the total number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery executed every time the AT lottery condition is satisfied.

  Note that when the AT flag indicating AT is set and the number of navigation stocks is further acquired in the AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks is not limited to the addition and is rewritten to the number of navigation stocks assigned this time. May be. In this case, the AT flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c may be rewritten to an AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks according to the result of the current AT lottery.

[AT management processing]
The sub-control unit 91 performs the AT management process included in the AT control process when in the normal gaming state, RT3, or RT4, and thereby based on the AT flag and the incubation period set according to the AT lottery result. , Manage control to AT.

  Specifically, when the control to the normal gaming state is started, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when the AT flag is specified as AT. In the normal gaming state, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks. When the RT3 is controlled by the promotion lip winning in the normal gaming state during the AT, the control to the AT is continued also in the RT3.

  When RT3 is controlled to RT4 by a rush lip winning in RT3 during AT, the start condition to AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1 is satisfied, and RT4 while digesting the game a predetermined number of times (for example, 50) And it controls to ART which is AT. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stock subtracted by 1.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to count the number of games that have been digested when it is an ART, and control it to non-AT when it reaches a predetermined number of times. In the present embodiment, since the number of games controlled by AT by consuming 1 Navistock and the number of games controlled by RT4 are set to the same number of games, the number of games in ART is set to a predetermined number. When it reaches, the AT is terminated and the normal gaming state is controlled. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT. In other words, a series of AT termination conditions are satisfied when the AT flag for controlling from AT to non-AT is 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag when it is controlled to be non-AT that it is not AT, it is not controlled again by the AT and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, after being controlled to the normal gaming state from RT4, the promotion lip, the falling lip, the winning lip winning probability, and the reel control at the time of winning, the promotion lip winning and the rushing lip winning are less likely to occur, the falling lip winning Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control to RT3 and RT4 and the control to RT3 from being continued as much as possible. As a result, the possibility that the game is played in the normal gaming state is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag when controlled to non-AT is 1 or more, a latent period determination process is performed to determine a latent period until the next AT can be controlled. The The incubation period is a period of forcibly delaying the timing at which the start condition for allowing the AT to be controlled again after the AT controlled until the game is consumed a predetermined number of times by consuming 1 Navistock, etc. This is the period until the notification period can be reached again after the AT ends, that is, the period in which the AT is hidden. In the incubation period determination process, for example, a random lottery is performed using a random number or the like from a predetermined number of types of games or a predetermined number of games, and as a result, the number of winning games is determined as the incubation period. Is done.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing, and if the AT flag specifies that it is AT, but if it is non-AT, whether or not the number of games set as the incubation period has been consumed in the incubation period determination processing. Is determined. When the number of games during the incubation period is consumed, the AT start condition can be satisfied again. After it is determined that the number of games in the incubation period has been consumed, the AT start condition is established by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state.

  The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state means push order promotion replays 1 to 6 including a promotion lip when in a normal gaming state, and push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 including a rushing lip or a falling lip when RT3, And push order rush replays 1 to 4, and push order melons 1 to 5 when RT 4.

  Then, when it is determined that the winning combination corresponding to the game state is won, the same processing as described above is performed. That is, in the normal gaming state or RT3, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming the number of navigation stock. Further, when it is RT4, it is controlled to ART while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times by consuming one navigation stock number. Thereby, since the navigation effect is executed, it is possible to make the promotion lip winning, the fall lip winning avoidance, the rush lip winning, and the melon 1 winning (12 payouts) intentionally won.

  As described above, when it is RT4, it is controlled to ART while a predetermined number of games are consumed by consuming 1 navigation stock number. Also, even when the game has been digested a predetermined number of times in ART and once controlled to be non-AT, if the AT flag is still specified as AT and the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more, the incubation period has passed. Later, the AT can be controlled again. Thus, it can be said that the AT can be controlled over a period corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the AT lottery result. In addition, it can be said that the AT can be repeatedly controlled by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the AT lottery result.

  It should be noted that the incubation period is not limited to the one in which the incubation period is provided, but when the game is digested a predetermined number of times corresponding to 1 Navistock in the ART and the AT flag is still specified and the number of Navistock is 1 or more. Without being controlled, the ART corresponding to the next one navigation stock may be immediately controlled.

[Game effect execution processing]
The sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby controlling the navigation target according to the game state based on a command from the main control unit 41 when controlled by the AT. The navigation effect corresponding to the winning combination is executed.

  As a navigation effect when one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won, a push order (see FIG. 11) for causing the RT 3 to control the promotion lip according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 1 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 2 is won, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5, a push order for maintaining RT3 by avoiding a falling lip winning prize and winning a promotion lip according to the winning situation (FIG. 12) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 2, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order rush replays 1 to 4, a push order for avoiding the falling lip winning and depending on the winning situation and causing the rush lip to win and controlling the RT 4 (see FIG. 13) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the push forward entry replay 1. Further, as a navigation effect when winning in the push order entry replay 2, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order melons 1 to 5, the push order for stopping the “melon” of the middle reel 2C in the middle and paying out 12 medals according to the winning situation. (See FIG. 14) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the push order melon 1 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the push order melon 2 is won, a message such as “order push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified in the same manner regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate with an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient as long as a player can distinguish according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game state effect execution process to display a game state effect related to the current game state or effect state, such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, etc. Perform using the electrical parts.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when it is non-AT (including the incubation period) regardless of the gaming state, a normal effect (for example, a message such as “normally” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) is performed. . In addition, a special effect (for example, a message such as “AT in progress” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) is performed during the AT regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a bonus is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) on the condition that a strawberry or grape that can be simultaneously won with any of BB2, BB3, and RB has a relatively high probability. There will be a performance to recognize that you are selected. That is, as the gaming state effect, a continuous effect is provided for notifying information regarding whether or not the bonus is won over a predetermined period on condition that a strawberry or grape is won. This continuous effect is an effect in which, after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a predetermined period, a bonus winning notification is made to notify the presence / absence and type of bonus winning as the ending of the story. Thereby, it can be said that the bonus may be won over a predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, the sub control part 91 performs a promotion effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during BB by executing a game effect execution process. The promotion effect is an effect for facilitating stopping the “black BAR” of the left reel 2L on the winning line L4 to win the BAR cherry and stopping “white 7” on the winning line L1. The predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when a special is won, when a predetermined lottery is won, and when a previous game is started.

  As a result, when the promotion effect is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation that a special has been won and a freeze will occur in the next game. It is possible to encourage the player to stop “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” on the winning line L1, which has been determined and can specify whether or not the navigation stock will be given. Further, in the freeze in the specific game, “black 7-black 7-black 7” and “white 7-white 7-white 7” temporarily stop on the winning line L1, and “black 7-black 7-black 7”. It is possible to increase the chances of providing the fun of temporarily stopping the “V” in the inverted V shape and “White 7-White 7-White 7” in the V shape.

  Whether or not the special is won out of the predetermined conditions is specified based on the internal winning command. The predetermined lottery is performed on the side of the sub-control unit 91 and refers to a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a promotion effect at random using, for example, a random number when a special is not won. It is specified based on the lottery result whether or not the lottery is won in the predetermined lottery. Further, whether or not the previous game has been started is specified based on a game state command, a winning determination command, an internal winning command, and the like. In the present embodiment, the previous game is the third game in the fourth RB. Also, one RB ends with 4 wins. For this reason, for example, after specifying that the BB has started based on the gaming state command, the number of times that a winning determination command indicating winning has been received is 4 × 3 = 12 times, and then an internal winning command is issued. When the number of times of reception reaches the third time, it may be determined that the previous game was started.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes the effect-in-execution execution process included in the game effect execution process, so that the above-described freeze occurrence effect, operation effect, and lottery result corresponding effect during the freezing of the specific game in the BB. Execute.

  The freeze generation effect is an effect that is executed when an initial command is received, and is an effect that notifies that a freeze has occurred. The freeze generation effect is executed, for example, by displaying a message such as “Start Freeze! I did it” on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating a specific sound effect from the speakers 53 and 54.

  The operation effect is an effect that is executed when a predetermined period (2.5 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the first command, or when a predetermined period (3.0 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the frozen command. Thus, it refers to an effect for promoting the operation of the start switch 7 during the operation reception period. The operation effect is executed by, for example, displaying a message such as “Lever operation!” On the liquid crystal display 51 and generating a specific sound effect from the speakers 53 and 54.

  The lottery result corresponding effect is an effect that is executed when a command during freezing is received, and refers to an effect for notifying the acquired navigation stock when the lottery result is a success pattern. Is an effect for notifying that the next time is a chance, and when the lottery result is a failure pattern, an effect for notifying that the navigation stock could not be acquired. For example, when the lottery result is a successful pattern, the lottery result corresponding effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with a message such as “Yeah! Acquired x navigation!” (X is the number of acquired navigation stocks). This is executed by generating a specific sound effect from the speakers 53 and 54. Further, when the lottery result is a notice pattern, a message such as “Next Chance!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a specific sound effect is generated from the speakers 53 and 54. Further, when the lottery result is a failure pattern, a message such as “sorry” (x is the number of acquired navigation stocks) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a specific sound effect is generated from the speakers 53 and 54. It is executed by.

  Here, an example of the promotion effect, the freeze generation effect, the operation effect, and the lottery result corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of the promotion effect, the freeze generation effect, the operation effect, and the lottery result corresponding effect. FIG. 29 shows a liquid crystal display 51, reels 2L to 2R visually recognized through the transparent window 3, and winning lines L1 to L4.

  FIGS. 29A to 29C are diagrams for explaining an example of the promotion effect. FIG. 29A shows a state when a game (previous game) in which a predetermined condition is established is started. The start switch 7 is operated as shown on the left side of the see-through window 3 to start the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R (see the downward arrow in the figure). "!" Is displayed.

  As a result, the player has a sense of expectation that a special has been won and that a freezing will occur in the next game. If a freezing occurs, the success pattern will be determined and navigation stock will be granted. It is possible to encourage the player to stop “white 7-white 7-black BAR” on the winning line L1 that can specify whether or not the game is to be performed. In addition, since the promotion effect is always executed in the previous game, “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is temporarily stopped in the previous game, and “black 7-black 7-black” is frozen in the specific game. 7 ”and“ White 7-White 7-White 7 ”are stopped on the winning line L1, and“ Black 7-Black 7-Black 7 ”is inverted V-shaped,“ White 7-White 7-White ” It is possible to increase the chances of providing the fun that the “7” is temporarily stopped in the V shape.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which “WHITE 7-WHITE 7-BLACK BAR” is stopped on the pay line L1 in the game in which the promotion effect is executed, although the BAR cherry wins. When “WHITE 7 – WHITE 7 – BLACK BAR” stops on the winning line L1 after winning the BAR Cherry, the character appears as a result of the promotion effect, and the special to which the navigation stock is given has not been won. Is likely to be frozen in the next game, a message “still more” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. At this time, the player recognizes that the special is not won, but can have a sense of expectation that a freeze will occur in the next game.

  FIG. 29 (c) shows a state where, in the game in which the promotion effect is executed, a BAR cherry win is made and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped on the pay line L1. When “WHITE 7 – WHITE 7 – WHITE 7” stopped on the winning line L1 as a result of winning the BAR cherry, the V-signed character appeared as a result of the promotion effect, and “Ya done” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Thereby, it can be notified that the special has been won and the navigation stock will be given.

  In this way, when “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 and it is notified that navigation stock is given, the main control is performed even if the next game is a specific game. Of the freeze-related processes on the part 41 side, the processes after S02 are not performed, and control is performed so as not to generate a freeze. Thus, even if the freeze occurs and the variation control is performed according to the success pattern, when the stop symbol on the winning line L1 of the previous game is “white 7-white 7-white 7”, “black 7 -To make the player feel distrust that the navigation stock is not given because the specific results such as "Black 7-Black 7" and "White 7-White 7-White 7" are not stopped. Can be prevented.

  In the game in which the promotion effect is executed, when a symbol other than FIG. 29B or FIG. 29C is stopped, a message such as “failure” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 without the character appearing.

  The aspect of the promotion effect is not limited to such an aspect, and may be any aspect as long as it promotes stopping “White 7” on the winning line L1. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  FIG. 29D is a diagram for explaining an example of the freeze occurrence effect. FIG. 29 (d) shows a state when the specific game is started after the previous game in which the promotion effect was executed ends. As shown on the left side of the fluoroscopic window 3, the start switch 7 is operated, and the reels 2L to 2R start to rotate in a frozen state (the wavy line indicates that the rotation speed is higher than the normal rotation speed). At the same time, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a message “Freeze started! Thereby, unlike the normal rotation, the player can easily understand that the variation control during the freeze has started. On the other hand, FIG. 29 (e) is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect when no freeze occurs in the specific game. As described above, the sub-control unit 91 executes the effect shown in FIG. 29E when the first command is not received at the start of the next game after the game specified as the previous game. In FIG. 29E, the same reel control as usual is performed by each of the reels 2L to 2R, a character appears on the liquid crystal display 51, and a message such as “sorry” is displayed.

  FIG. 29 (f) is a diagram for describing an example of the operation effect during the freeze started in FIG. 29 (d). FIG. 29 (f) shows a state in which an operation effect is executed under the control of the operation reception period after the symbol is stopped according to the frame number data based on the first preparation data or the next preparation data of the success data during the freeze. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 29B, since the freeze is started in a state where “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, the winning line L1 in FIG. 29F. “Melon-melon-banana” is stopped at the same timing for each reel (the wavy lines on both sides of each reel indicate that each reel is swaying finely and stopped), and above the winning line L2. As indicated by the dotted line, “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a message such as “Lever operation!” As a character appears as an operation effect. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that it is time to operate the start switch 7.

  FIGS. 29G to 29K are diagrams for explaining an example of the lottery result corresponding effect. First, FIG. 29 (g) shows a success A when the start switch 7 is operated within the operation reception period in the state shown in FIG. 29 (f) or when the operation reception period ends without receiving the operation. The figure shows the state when the design is stopped by the control based on the successful derivation data. As shown in FIG. 29 (b), since the freeze is started in a state where "white 7-white 7-black BAR" is stopped on the winning line L1, in FIG. 29 (g), the winning line is displayed. "Black 7-Black 7-Black 7" is stopped on L1 at the same timing of each reel (the wavy lines on both sides of each reel indicate that the reels are finely swaying and stopped). Note that, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the freeze started in a state where “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, the control based on the success derivation data of the success B data. Is performed, "white 7-white 7-white 7" is stopped on the winning line L1 at the same timing of each reel (each reel is swayed finely and stopped). Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the control based on the success data has been performed, and as a result, it is possible to indirectly notify that the navigation stock has been acquired.

  The liquid crystal display 51 displays a message such as “Yeah! Two Navis!” As a character appears as an effect corresponding to the lottery result. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the navigation stock has been acquired and the number of acquisitions.

  FIG. 29 (h) is a diagram for describing an example of an effect during the period from the end of the lottery result corresponding effect until the operation effect is executed again. FIG. 29 (h) shows a state when the symbol is started to rotate by the control based on the next preparation data of the success A data in the state shown in FIG. 29 (g). On the liquid crystal display 51, a character appears and a message such as “Take it again!” Is displayed in preparation for the next operation effect. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the player can operate again. When the control based on the next preparation data of the success A data is performed and the symbol is stopped, the state is the same as the state shown in FIG. The same is true even when the control is performed based on the next preparation data of the success B data. As described above, when the control based on the success pattern is performed during the freeze, the state returns to the same state as in FIG.

  FIG. 29 (i) shows the notification A data in the state shown in FIG. 29 (f) when the start switch 7 is operated within the operation reception period or when the operation reception period ends without receiving the operation. A state when the control is performed based on the notice derivation data and the symbol is stopped is shown. As shown in FIG. 29B, since the freeze is started in a state where “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, the winning line is shown in FIG. 29 (i). “Black 7-Banana-Black 7” is stopped on L1 at the same timing of each reel (the wavy lines on both sides of each reel indicate that each reel is finely swaying and stopped). “-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped in an inverted V-shape. Note that, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the freeze started in a state where “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, the control based on the advance derivation data of the advance notice B data is performed. Is performed, "White 7-Strawberry-White 7" is stopped on the winning line L1 at the same timing of each reel (each reel is finely shaken and stopped), and "White 7-White 7-White 7" is stopped. Is stopped in a V-shape. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a message such as “Next Chance!” As a character appears as an effect corresponding to the lottery result. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the control based on the advance notice data has been performed, and as a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for successfully acquiring the navigation stock by the next operation. Then, in preparation for the next operation effect, the same effect as in FIG. 29 (h) and 29 (f), when the reel control based on the notice pattern is performed, it may be different from the case where the reel control based on the success pattern is performed. For example, when reel control is performed with a notice pattern, another character appears on the liquid crystal display 51 as an effect corresponding to FIG. 29 (h), and “next expectation” is prepared for the next operation effect. Message is displayed, and as an effect corresponding to FIG. 29 (f), another character appears on the liquid crystal display 51, and a message such as “This time is expected!” Is displayed. Also good.

  FIGS. 29J and 29K show states when control based on the failure pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 29 (j), after control is performed to finely swing the already stopped reel, as shown in FIG. 29 (k), in order to shift to normal reel control, Start rotation. Further, in the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. 29 (j), in order to notify that the failure pattern has been determined, a character appears and a message such as “sorry” is displayed. As shown in k), when the number of navigation stocks acquired during the current freeze is 8, a message such as “Navistock 8 acquisition!” is displayed. Thereby, it becomes impossible to specify whether or not navigation stock is given to the player.

  It should be noted that the symbols other than “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” on the winning line L1 shown in FIG. 29B are displayed without stopping at the timing when “White 7” is stopped on the winning line in the previous game. If it is stopped, even if it is temporarily stopped according to the success pattern, “black 7-black 7-black 7” or “white 7” is displayed on the winning line L1, as shown in FIG. The specific appearance such as “white 7-white 7” is not stopped, and the notification shown in FIG. 29G is not performed. Also, during freezing, if a specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” or “white 7-white 7-white 7” is not stopped on the winning line L1, the character does not appear. Alternatively, a message such as “unspecified” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for the acquired number of navigation stocks. In this case, a message such as “unspecified” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for the acquired number of navigation stocks in FIG. Thereby, when the promotion effect shown in FIG. 29A is executed, it is possible to encourage the player to operate “White 7” at the timing to stop it on the winning line.

  Note that the aspects of the effects shown in FIG. 29, such as the promotion effect, the freeze generation effect, the operation effect, and the lottery result corresponding effect, are not limited to those shown in FIG. Further, the effects shown in FIG. 29 such as the promotion effect, the freeze generation effect, the operation effect, and the lottery result response effect are not limited to those displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. Or the like.

  Next, an example of the gaming state effect executed in association with the establishment of the first to fifth, eighth, and ninth AT lottery conditions shown in FIG. 26 will be described. In order to ask whether or not the navigation stock has been acquired for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) by satisfying the first to fifth, eighth and ninth AT lottery conditions shown in FIG. Is continuously performed as a game state effect. This continuous effect is an effect of performing a navigation stock acquisition notification for notifying whether or not a navigation stock has been acquired as the ending of a story after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a predetermined period. Thereby, it can be said that the navigation stock may have been acquired over a predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When winning a strawberry or grape, a continuous effect is given as a game state effect for determining whether a bonus has been won and whether or not a navigation stock has been acquired. This continuous effect is an effect that, after performing an effect that develops a series of stories over a predetermined period, notifies the presence of Navistock acquisition and bonus winning as the end of the story. Thereby, it can be said that the navigation stock may have been acquired over a predetermined period and that the bonus may have been won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 29 (f) and 29 (g), the lottery result is obtained by accepting an operation to the start switch 7 during the period in which the freeze occurs. While the corresponding effect is executed, as shown in S10 of FIG. 18, the freeze corresponding to the lottery result corresponding effect from the time when the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted as the timing related to the execution of the lottery result corresponding effect. A period counter and control data are newly set, and the progress of the game is delayed over a period corresponding to the freeze period counter and control data. For this reason, for example, the freeze period counter is not updated even though the freeze has occurred and the operation to the start switch 7 has been accepted early in the operation acceptance period and the lottery result corresponding effect has already been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the period in which the freeze has occurred and the effect during the freeze such as the lottery result corresponding effect, in which only the freeze continues for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that makes the player feel uncomfortable due to the period in which the freeze occurs and the effect during the freeze such as the lottery result response effect.

  (1-2) In the above-described embodiment, the reel effect control based on the control data shown in FIG. 21 is an aspect that is not performed except during the period in which the freeze occurs. It is possible to improve the interest during the period when the freeze is occurring.

  (1-3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, when the reel effect control by the success pattern is performed during the freeze in the RB specific game in the BB, Navistock is granted. On the other hand, when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game, if the reel effect control by the success pattern is performed during the freeze in the specific game, FIG. 29 (g). As shown in the figure, the specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the effect based on the success pattern for stopping the specific appearance on the winning line L1 is executed on the winning line L1 by the reel effect control during the period in which the freeze occurs. .

  (1-4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S08 to S10 in FIG. 18, the lottery result corresponding effect is executed even when the operation acceptance period ends without accepting the operation. The freeze period counter and control data corresponding to the lottery result corresponding effect are newly set, and the progress of the game is delayed over the period corresponding to the freeze period counter and control data. For this reason, for example, the freeze period counter is not updated even though the freeze has occurred and the operation to the start switch 7 has been received early in the operation acceptance period and the lottery result corresponding effect has already been executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the period in which the freeze is generated and the effect during the freeze such as the lottery result corresponding effect, in which only the freeze continues continuously. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that makes the player feel uncomfortable due to the period in which the freeze occurs and the effect during the freeze such as the lottery result response effect.

  (1-5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S12 of FIG. 18, after the operation to the stop switch 7 is accepted and the control based on the success pattern or the notice pattern is started, it is again performed. The operation acceptance period is entered, and after the operation is accepted or the operation acceptance period ends, the lottery result corresponding effect based on the success pattern, the notice pattern, or the failure pattern is executed. For this reason, continuity can be given to the lottery result corresponding effect executed during the period in which the freeze occurs, and the interest during the period in which the freeze occurs can be improved.

  (1-6) According to the above-described embodiment, when the freeze is generated in the specific game, the stop control is performed to change the display state viewed from the fluoroscopic window 3 by rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R. Is done. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 26, the navigation stock is given as a privilege by performing the variation control according to the success pattern once during the stop control. Therefore, whether or not the variation control according to the success pattern is performed is an interest for the player. Whether or not the variation control according to the success pattern, which is of interest to such a player, has been performed is notified as follows.

  First, the fourth game in the fourth RB in BB1 or BB2 is determined in advance as a specific game, and the previous game of the third game in the RB in which the next game becomes the specific game is as shown in FIG. Even if the internal lottery result is not a special winning, the promotion effect is executed in the same manner as when the special winning is made. When the internal lottery result is a special winning, as shown in FIG. 29C, by operating at a specific timing, BAR cherry is won and “White 7-White 7-White 7” is displayed on the winning line L1. ”Is stopped, the player can specify that the navigation stock is given. For this reason, even when the promotion effect is executed in the previous game, it can be suggested that the operation is performed at a specific timing, and as shown in FIG. 29B, the BAR cherry is won in the previous game and the winning line L1. Further, the ratio of stopping “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” can be increased.

  In this way, after providing the previous game in which the ratio of stopping the “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is increased on the winning line L1 and winning the BAR cherry, the temporary stop in the next game is a specific game. In the control, the variation control according to the success pattern is performed, and as shown in FIG. 29E, the change control according to the unsuccessful pattern cannot be performed on the winning line L1. A specific display such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is changed to a specific display state for temporarily stopping. That is, assuming that the BAR cherry is won in the previous game and “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, “Black 7- By changing to a specific display state in which a specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7” is temporarily stopped, it is notified that the variation control according to the success pattern has been performed.

  As described above, as the variation control for temporarily stopping the specific event such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” on the winning line L1 during the stop control, as shown in FIG. By storing the pattern, without increasing the storage capacity as much as possible, when the variation control according to the success pattern is once performed during the stop control, a high rate is temporarily placed on the winning line L1 during the stop control. It is possible to notify that the navigation stock is to be provided by changing to a specific display state that temporarily stops the specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7-black 7”.

  In addition, navigation stock is given when the internal lottery result in BB becomes a special winning. For this reason, in addition to whether or not the variation control according to the success pattern has been performed, whether or not the internal lottery result in the BB becomes a special winning is also an issue for the player.

  Of these, whether or not the internal lottery result during BB is a special winning is determined by operating at a specific timing, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), winning BAR cherry and placing it on the winning line L1. It is notified by whether or not “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped. Therefore, in order to specify whether or not the internal lottery result in BB is a special winning, the player can be operated at a specific timing. As a result, when the internal lottery result is a special winning, the BAR cherry is won and the rate at which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 is increased. As shown in FIG. 29B, it is possible to increase the rate at which “BAR 7-WHITE 7-BLACK BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 while winning the BAR cherry in the previous game.

  On the other hand, whether or not the variation control according to the success pattern has been performed is based on the premise that BAR Cherry was won in the previous game and “White 7-White 7-Black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1. Then, during the stop control, the user is notified by changing to a specific display state in which a specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is temporarily stopped on the winning line L1. Therefore, even if “white 7-white 7-white 7” is not stopped on the winning line L1 by operating at a specific timing, “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is displayed on the winning line L1. Is stopped, the freeze is generated in the next game and the stop control is performed once, and a specific stop such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is temporarily stopped on the pay line L1. An expectation for changing to a display state can be given, and interest can be provided. Further, as variation control for temporarily stopping a specific event such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” on the winning line L1 during the stop control, as shown in FIG. 21, one pattern for each successful pattern. Is stored on the winning line L1 during the stop control at a high rate when the variation control according to the success pattern is performed once during the stop control without increasing the storage capacity as much as possible. It is possible to notify that navigation stock is to be provided by changing to a specific display state in which a specific output such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, navigation stock is given by winning a special in RB in BB. In the special winning game, a promotion effect is executed, and by operating at a specific timing, it is possible to win a BAR cherry and stop “white 7-white 7-white 7” on the winning line L1. For this reason, the importance of operating at a specific timing when a promotion effect is performed can be heightened. Also, due to this, it is possible to suggest that the operation is performed at a specific timing in the previous game in which the promotion effect is executed in the same manner. In the previous game, the BAR cherry is won and the white line “1” is displayed on the winning line L1. The ratio of stopping “white 7-black BAR” can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, when the promotion effect is executed, by operating at a specific timing, even when the internal lottery result is not specially won, the BAR cherry Can be awarded. For this reason, by operating at a specific timing when the promotion effect is executed, there is a disadvantage that no winnings can be generated even though the winnings are allowed to occur. There is no. As a result, it is possible to further improve the ratio of stopping the “white 7-white 7-black BAR” on the winning line L1 while winning the BAR cherry in the previous game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, “white 7” notified by the promotion effect is arranged only one by one for each reel. For this reason, it is easy to operate at a specific timing, and compared with the case where “white 7” is separately arranged, the specific control is not temporarily stopped by performing the variation control according to the success pattern. It is possible to prevent the white 7 "from being mistakenly aimed and to stop the operation, and to reliably stop the" white 7 "that temporarily stops the specific outcome. As a result, it is possible to further improve the ratio of stopping the “white 7-white 7-black BAR” on the winning line L1 while winning the BAR cherry in the previous game.

  Further, when the rotation control of the reels 2L to 2R is performed according to the control data shown in FIG. 21 used only during the freeze, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, that is, “black 7” or “ Since the reel effect control is performed so that any one of “White 7” is aligned on the winning line L1 and stopped once, an effect with an impact can be performed in the variation mode of the reel during the freeze period.

  (2-1) According to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, when the reel effect control by the success pattern is performed during the freeze period, the navigation stock is given. Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 29, the specific appearance is stopped only when the reel effect control by the success pattern is performed. As a result, it is notified that the navigation stock is given by stopping the specific outcome during the freeze period.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, when the reel effect control by the notice pattern is performed during the freeze period, the success pattern at a higher rate in the pattern lottery than when the reel effect control by the notice pattern is not performed. To be determined. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 29, the notice appearance is stopped only when the reel effect control by the notice pattern is performed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the ratio of the specific outcome being stopped and the navigation stock being given thereafter is high by stopping the advance notice during the freeze period. For this reason, during the freeze period, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for not only stopping the specific outcome but also stopping the advance appearance. As a result, since the variation of the opportunity which makes a player have an expectation increases, the interest of the game during the freeze period can be improved.

  (2-2) According to the above-described embodiment, the reel effect control is performed to stop the specific appearance and the advance notice in the freeze period in which the progress of the game is delayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as overlooking without knowing that the reel effect control for stopping the specific event or the notice event is being performed, and to make the player pay attention to the reel effect control. .

  (2-3) According to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, even when the reel effect control is performed by the notice pattern, it depends on whether the type is notice A or notice B. Different notices can be stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, pattern lottery is performed so that the ratio determined as a success pattern differs depending on whether the previous notice pattern is notice A or notice B. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the type of the notice notice is stopped, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (3-1) According to the above-described embodiment, the reel effect control is performed by rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in a non-steady state, in the timer interrupt process, the motor phase signal output process (Si5), the reel start process (Si7) ), Motor step processing (Si8), and motor phase signal standby processing (Si9) are sequentially executed. These motor phase signal output processing (Si5), reel start processing (Si7), motor step processing (Si8), and motor phase signal standby processing (Si9) are executed according to conditions such as gaming state and execution period ( This process is executed before a different process (special process). Here, special processing includes LED dynamic display processing (Si10), control signal output processing (Si11), command transmission processing (Si14), external output signal update processing (Si15), port input processing (Si17), origin Examples of the process include an on-pass process (Si18), a switch input determination process (Si19), and the like, and may be a single process or a process realized by combining a plurality of these processes. As described above, in the timer interrupt process, the special process is performed by executing the process (unsteady rotation process) for realizing the reel effect before the special process having a different process period executed according to a predetermined condition. Thus, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R can be controlled to rotate unsteadily. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from being in a predetermined unsteady rotation under the influence of a special process that is executed in accordance with a predetermined condition. It is possible to prevent the interest of the production from deteriorating. Specifically, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R do not rotate in a predetermined non-steady state, so that the player may mistakenly recognize that another reel effect has been performed, or even recognize that it is not a reel effect. The situation can be prevented.

  (3-2) According to the embodiment described above, the steady rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that realizes variable display of symbols in the normal period other than the freeze period is also performed in the motor phase signal output process ( Si5), reel start processing (Si7), motor step processing (Si8), and motor phase signal standby processing (Si9). For this reason, not only the unsteady rotation process, but also the process of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to display the variation of the identification information (steady rotation process) is executed before the special process. It is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable due to the irregular rotation of the 2C and 2R without the regular rotation.

  (4-1) In the above-described embodiment, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game is held until the end of the next game, and the output such as a specific output or a notice output is temporarily performed during the freeze period. After stopping (after stopping once if it is stopped several times), before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship of the three reels is initialized. The positional relationship, that is, the relative positional relationship at the end of the previous game, which is specified from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game, and the positional relationship that becomes a specific appearance or a notice appearance Even if the reel effect control is performed so as to become such a case, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective after that, even if such a reel effect control is not performed. These stop switch 8L, 8C, will not change the degree of difficulty of the reel stop operation by 8R. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the same positional relationship as when the reels were stopped in the previous game, that is, the positional relationship with no regularity. Even if the reel production control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the slot machine that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control The gameplay will not be compromised.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, by holding the stop position of each reel at the end of the game until the end of the next game, the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game can be specified, and the end of the previous game is completed. The initial positional relationship before the positional relationship between the reels is changed by the reel effect control from the stop position of each reel at the time, and the positional relationship between the reels at that time after the game starts The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing the control for detecting, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected for all the reels.

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is provided with a plurality of reels. However, the configuration may be provided with only one reel, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. In other words, before the operation of the stop switch is validated, after performing an effect to stop a predetermined specific appearance or notice output on one reel, it is specified from the reel stop position at the end of the previous game. By returning to the initial positional relationship at the end of the previous game (including those that maintain rotation or stop the output at the end of the previous game), Even if the reel effect control is performed so as to stop the operation, even if such a reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, The difficulty of the reel stop operation does not change. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the rotation position of the reel after the lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the steady rotation of the reel becomes the same rotation position regardless of whether or not the reel effect control is performed. In other words, by returning to a rotational position with no regularity, even if the reel production control is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed. By doing so, the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player is not impaired.

  (4-2) In the above-described embodiment, after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship of the three reels is changed to the initial positional relationship. In addition to returning to the initial positional relationship, control that suggests that the initial positional relationship has been returned is performed, and the positional relationship between the reels is aligned in a straight line by reel effect control. It is possible to inform the player that the initial positional relationship has been returned to the initial positional relationship, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R misunderstand that some symbols are in a linear relationship. It is possible to prevent the reel stop operation from being performed.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the example of determining the reel effect control during the freeze period according to the result of the pattern lottery during the freeze period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the second embodiment, an example will be described in which the reel effect control during the freeze period is determined when the freeze period is started. Note that in the second embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the slot machine in the first embodiment will be omitted, and different parts from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a flowchart of freeze-related processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the freeze-related processing is performed when the game is started by operating the start switch 7 during BB1 or BB2.

  In Ss01 to Ss03, the same processing as that shown in S01 to S03 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment is performed. If it is determined in Ss03 that freezing has been determined, the freezing occurs in the processes subsequent to Ss04. During the freeze period, reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed. The reel effect control in the second embodiment includes control based on any one of the success pattern, the notice pattern, and the failure pattern, as in the first embodiment.

  In Ss04, the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is performed during the freeze-controlled period, and the notice lottery for determining the kind of the notice pattern in the case where it is performed is performed. The preliminary lottery is performed according to a distribution rate according to the winning situation in a predetermined period until the predetermined timing is reached. The predetermined period refers to the first to third RBs in BB1 or BB2 in which freeze-related processing is performed, for example, in the case where freeze occurrence is determined. Note that the predetermined period that affects the distribution rate in the notice lottery may be a period that is different from the period that affects the distribution rate in the freeze occurrence determination.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the notice lottery table used for the notice lottery on the main control unit 41 side. In the notice lottery in the present embodiment, the lottery is randomly performed using a random number or the like according to the distribution ratio according to the winning situation in the first to third RBs with reference to the notice lottery table.

  As the winning status in the 1st to 3rd RBs, when the chance is won, 30% of the control data of the notice pattern is decided as the notice A data, and 50% is decided as the notice B data. Determined at 20% without notice.

  As the winning status in the 1st to 3rd RBs, when the chance is not won, it is determined to be 30% of the control data of the notice pattern as the notice A data and to 10% of the notice B data. Determined at a rate of 60% without notice.

  During the freeze, the reel production control is performed based on the predetermined initial preparation data, and when it is decided to execute the notice pattern, the reel production control is performed based on the decided notice data, and then the success pattern And reel effect control based on the control data of the failure pattern is performed. If it is not decided to execute the notice pattern, reel effect control is performed based on the control data of the success pattern and the failure pattern after reel effect control is performed based on the initial preparation data.

  In Ss05, a success number lottery is performed to determine the number of successes of performing the reel effect control based on the success pattern during the period of freezing control. The success number lottery is performed according to the distribution ratio according to the result of the preliminary lottery.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the success number lottery table used for the success number lottery on the main control unit 41 side. In the success number lottery in the present embodiment, the lottery is randomly performed using a random number or the like according to the distribution ratio according to the result of the preliminary lottery with reference to the success number lottery table.

  When the notice A data is determined as the notice pattern, the number of successes is determined as “0 times”, “1 time”, and “2 times” at a rate of 10%, and “3 times” at a rate of 15%. , “4 times”, and “5 times” and “6 times” at a rate of 20%.

  When the notice B data is determined as the notice pattern, the number of successes is determined to be “0 times” and “1 time” at a rate of 5%, and “2 times” and “3 times” at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be “4 times” at a rate of 15%, “5 times” at a rate of 20%, and “6 times” at a rate of 35%.

  When it is determined without notice, the number of successes is determined to be “0” at a rate of 30%, “1” and “2” at a rate of 15%, and at a rate of 10%. Each of “3 times” to “6 times” is determined.

  In this way, the reel production control by the notice pattern is executed at a higher rate when the chance is won than when the chance is not won in the first to third RBs. A preliminary lottery will be held. Further, when the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed, the distribution ratio is set so that the number of subsequent successes is higher at a higher rate than when the reel effect control by the notice pattern is not executed. Even when the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed, the reel effect control is executed based on the notice B data at a higher rate than when the reel effect control is executed based on the notice A data. The distribution rate is set so that the number of subsequent successes is increased.

  During freezing, reel production control is performed based on predetermined initial preparation data, and then reel production control is performed based on the notice pattern according to the result of the notice lottery, and then reel production control based on the success pattern. Is performed for the determined number of successes, and reel effect control based on the failure pattern is performed. Therefore, the freeze period changes according to the presence / absence of the notice and the determined number of successes.

  Returning to FIG. 30, in Ss06, a notice flag for specifying the presence / absence and type of the notice is set, set to the value of the success number counter for specifying the number of successes determined in the success number lottery, and the notice Based on the presence / absence and the determined number of successes, the value of the freeze period counter for specifying the period to be controlled to freeze is set. The value of the notice flag and the success counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When control data based on the notice pattern is set, the notice flag is erased, and each time control data based on the success pattern is set in Ss13 described later. 1 is subtracted.

  The value of the freeze period counter includes the basic period of initial preparation data (5 seconds), the basic time of the notice pattern (5 seconds) according to the result of the notice lottery, and the basic period of success pattern (5 seconds). A value corresponding to the total period of the period (5 × success number) calculated by multiplying the determined number of successes and the basic period (3 seconds) of the failure pattern is set. The value of the freeze period counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is subtracted according to the progress of the game (elapsed time). For example, when the number of successes is 2 without notice, the value corresponding to 18 seconds, which is the total period of the basic periods of the initial preparation data, the success pattern twice, and the failure pattern, is set as the value of the freeze period counter. Is done. In addition, when there is a notice and the number of successes is two times, the value corresponding to 23 seconds that is the total period of the basic period of each of the initial preparation data, the notice pattern, the success pattern twice, and the failure pattern is the value of the freeze period counter. Set to a value.

  In Ss07, a process for transmitting a freeze command for specifying the occurrence of a freeze, the presence / absence of a notice, the type of notice, and the number of successes to the sub-control unit 91 is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the freeze command, it performs a freeze occurrence effect corresponding to the occurrence of the freeze described in the first embodiment. A plurality of types of freeze generation effects are provided, and the types of freeze generation effects are determined at different rates depending on the presence / absence of the notice specified from the freeze command and the number of successes.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 performs an operation effect for promoting the operation to the start switch 7 when the timing at which the first operation reception period starts after receiving the freeze command is reached.

  In Ss08, initial preparation data is set, and reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed based on the initial preparation data. The control based on the initial preparation data is executed over a predetermined basic period (5 seconds), and during that time, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated at the same timing after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated in the same manner as normal. Operation acceptance for accepting an operation to the start switch 7 after a predetermined period (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the control based on the initial preparation data after the reels are stopped (the reels are swayed finely). Controlled by period.

  The control contents based on the initial preparation data will be described later with reference to FIG. When an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the initial preparation data is terminated, and another control data (the control data of the notice pattern when there is a notice, the success pattern or the data when there is no notice) (Control data of failure pattern) is newly set, and control based on the control data is executed.

  Ss09 is a counter for specifying a period during which the control based on the set control data is executed, and is a period adjustment for adjusting the period during which the control based on the next control data is executed according to the operation timing. A value corresponding to the initial preparation data is set in the counter. Specifically, a value corresponding to the time (5 seconds) during which the reel effect control is performed based on the initial preparation data is set as the value of the period adjustment counter. The value of the period adjustment counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is updated as the game progresses (time elapses).

  In Ss10, it is determined whether or not the control content based on the control data is an operation acceptance period. When it is determined that it is not the operation reception period, the process of Ss10 is repeated, and when it is determined that it is the operation reception period, the process proceeds to Ss11 and it is determined whether or not an operation to the start switch 7 is received. .

  If it is determined in Ss11 that an operation to the start switch 7 has not been accepted, it is determined in Ss12 whether or not the operation acceptance period has ended and the value of the period adjustment counter has reached zero. If the operation acceptance period has ended in Ss12 and it is not determined that the value of the period adjustment counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to Ss11.

  When it is determined that the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted in Ss11, and when it is determined that the operation acceptance period is ended without accepting the operation and the value of the period adjustment counter reaches 0 in Ss12. The control based on the set control data is terminated, and in Ss13, the next control data in which the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the basic period is set, and the reel 2L is set based on the control data. Reel effect control by ~ 2R is executed.

  The next control data is specified by a notice flag and the value of a success counter which is subtracted every time the control data based on the success pattern is set in Ss13. That is, when the notice flag is set, control data for the notice pattern is set. Further, when the notice flag is not set and the value of the success counter has not yet reached 0, the success pattern control data is set, and when it has reached 0, it is based on the failure pattern. Control data is set. Further, when setting the control data based on the success pattern, the lottery for determining the type of the success pattern is further performed, and the control data based on the success pattern of the type according to the lottery result is set. As types of success patterns, success A and success B, which will be described later, are provided. A lottery for determining the type of success pattern is performed so that the success A is selected more frequently than the success B.

  The next control data in which the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period is the basic period predetermined for the next control data, and the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added. Control data for executing reel effect control over a set period.

  For example, when the value of the period adjustment counter is 0, the next control data in which the basic period is the execution period is set, and when the value of the period adjustment counter is 1 or more (that is, based on the previous control data). When the start switch 7 is operated before the control is completed), the next control in which the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the basic period and the adjusted (extended) period becomes the execution period Data is set.

  In the basic period, the notice pattern and the success pattern are each set to 5 seconds, and the failure pattern is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, when the control data corresponding to the notice pattern or success pattern is set as the next control data when the value of the period adjustment counter is 0, the notice pattern or success pattern corresponding to the execution period of 5 seconds is supported. When the control data to be set is set and the control data corresponding to the failure pattern is set as the next control data, the control data corresponding to the failure pattern having an execution period of 3 seconds is set. Further, when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to 1 second, when the control data corresponding to the notice pattern or the success pattern is set as the next control data, the execution period is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6. When the control data corresponding to the second is set and the control data corresponding to the failure pattern is set as the next control data, the control data corresponding to the failure pattern in which the execution period is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds is set. .

  As a result, the timing at which the control based on the control data corresponding to the advance notice pattern, the success pattern, or the failure pattern ends is the same regardless of whether the control is started by the operation or the timing at which the operation is performed. It can be timing. For example, regarding the control based on the control data corresponding to the success pattern executed during the freeze, the operation in the control is performed regardless of whether the control is started when the operation is received or the timing at which the operation is received. When an operation is not accepted during the reception period, it can be executed until a common specific timing at which the control ends. In addition, regarding control based on control data corresponding to a notice pattern executed during freezing, the operation is performed during freezing regardless of whether the control was started when the operation was accepted or when the operation was accepted. Is not executed until a common specific timing at which the control ends. In addition, regarding control based on control data corresponding to a failure pattern executed during freezing, the operation is performed during freezing regardless of whether the control was started when the operation was accepted or when the operation was accepted. Is not executed until a common specific timing at which the control ends. That is, for example, when the number of successes is two times, the common specific timing is 10 seconds (total of the basic period of each of the initial preparation data and the success pattern) after the start of freezing, and 15 seconds (initial preparation data). In addition, the elapsed timing of 18 times (the total of the basic periods of the initial preparation data, the success pattern twice, and the failure pattern) elapsed time corresponds to the elapsed timing.

  As a result, when the value of the freeze period counter set in Ss06 based on the presence / absence of the notice and the number of successes is subtracted according to the progress of the game and reaches 0 regardless of the presence / absence of the operation and the operation timing during the freeze In addition, the control based on the control data corresponding to the failure pattern ends.

  The control based on the control data corresponding to the notice pattern or the success pattern is such that the reels 2L to 2R are rotated at a low speed within the execution period, the rotation is taken over and the rotation speed is increased, and all the reels 2L to 2R have the same timing. (The reels are swayed finely and stopped), and all the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again at a low speed and stopped, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the control based on the control data. Control is performed during an operation reception period in which an operation to the start switch 7 is received.

  In addition, control based on control data (failure data) corresponding to the failure pattern is performed by rotating the reels 2L to 2R at a low speed within the execution period, taking over the rotation, and increasing the rotation speed to all the reels 2L to 2R. Are stopped at the same timing (each reel is finely swayed and stopped), then all the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again at a low speed to end the freeze, and the normal reel control (steady rotation) is started.

  The control contents based on the control data corresponding to the notice pattern, the success pattern, and the failure pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. When an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period in the advance notice pattern or the success pattern, another control data is set, and the control based on the preparation data corresponding to the advance notice pattern or the success pattern is terminated and newly set. Control based on the control data is executed.

  In Ss14, a value corresponding to a period during which the control based on the control data set in Ss13 is executed (or an adjusted period when adjusted) is set as the value of the period adjustment counter. For example, when the execution period is not adjusted, a value corresponding to the basic period of the next control data is set as the value of the period adjustment counter, and when the execution period is adjusted, the basic period + period adjustment A value corresponding to the total period of the period corresponding to the counter counter value is reset as the period adjustment counter value. In Ss14, the example of resetting the value corresponding to the execution period of the next control data has been described as the value of the period adjustment counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A value corresponding to the basic period of the next control data may be added to the value.

  In Ss15, the type of the newly set control data, the notification timing when the control is started based on the notification data of the newly set control data and the symbol is stopped, and the operation start timing when the operation reception period is started are set. Processing for transmitting an operation time command for specifying to the sub-control unit 91 is performed. Based on the operation time command, the sub-control unit 91 performs the lottery result corresponding effect at the notification timing (timing at which the symbol is stopped by the control based on the notification data) specified from the operation time command. Further, in the sub-control unit 91, when a predetermined period (2.5 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the freeze command, or when the operation start timing specified from the operation command is reached based on the operation command In addition, an operation effect for promoting the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an AT lottery condition (for example, the sixth and seventh AT lottery conditions shown in FIG. 26) is successful based on the operation command.

  In Ss16, it is determined whether or not control data corresponding to the success pattern or the notice pattern is set. When it is determined that the control data corresponding to the success pattern or the notice pattern is set, the process proceeds to Ss10 again, and the processes after Ss10 are executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the control data of the success pattern and the advance notice pattern is set, that is, when the control data of the failure pattern is set, the process proceeds to Ss17.

  In Ss17, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze period counter has reached zero. In the present embodiment, the next control data in which the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the basic period in Ss13 is set and executed, and the control is started when the operation is accepted. Regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted or not, the control data corresponding to the failure pattern is displayed when the value of the freeze period counter reaches 0. The control based on can be terminated. Ss17 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the value of the freeze period counter has reached 0. When it is determined that the value has reached 0, the freeze-related processing is terminated. As a result, the freeze is terminated and the routine shifts to normal reel control (steady rotation).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Ss01 that the game is not a specific game, or if it is determined in Ss03 that it has not been determined to generate a freeze, the freeze-related process is terminated without performing a process for generating a freeze in Ss05 and thereafter.

  Next, control data used during freezing and control contents will be described. As the types of control data, as described above, the initial preparation data set in Ss05 in FIG. 30, the advance notice data A, the advance notice B data, and the success pattern set in Ss13 in FIG. A data, success B data, and failure data as failure patterns are provided. These initial preparation data, advance notice A data, advance notice B data, success A data, success B data, and failure data are the frame number data for specifying the symbols to be stopped after each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated. including. These data are used only for reel effect control during freeze, as in the first embodiment.

  For the initial preparation data, the reels 2L to 2R are started to rotate in the same manner as usual, and the symbols specified from the frame number data are stopped on the winning line L1 after the rotation speed is rotated at a higher speed than usual. The notification data and the data to be controlled in the operation reception period from the start of the control based on the data until the end of the predetermined period (2.5 seconds).

  For the notification data of the initial preparation data, “11” for the left reel 2L, “14” for the middle reel 2C, and “11” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data, as in FIG. As a result, when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game, freezing is started, and when the initial preparation data is used, the “melon” is displayed on the winning line L1. “-Melon-banana” is stopped, and “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped above the winning line L2.

  The success data includes the pre-notification data for rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R at a lower speed than normal, and the symbols specified from the frame number data after taking over the rotation from the pre-notification data and increasing the rotation speed. Notification data to be stopped on L1, and post-notification data to stop the symbol specified from the frame number data on the winning line L1 after rotating the reels 2L to 2R again at a low speed after stopping the symbol by the notification data. And data to be controlled during the operation reception period until a predetermined period (3 seconds, 3 seconds + α when the execution period is adjusted) elapses after the control based on the data is started.

  When the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period, half of the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated at a low speed by the pre-notification data. The remaining half of the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added (extended) to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R based on the post-notification data is rotated at a low speed. The period during which the control is performed based on the notification data is configured to be constant regardless of the value of the period adjustment counter.

  As for the notification data of the success A data, “2” for the left reel 2L, “2” for the middle reel 2C, and “2” for the right reel 2R as the frame number data, as in the success derivation of the success A data of FIG. 2 "is defined. Thus, for example, as a stop pattern immediately before starting the control based on the success A data, the “melon” of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L, the “melon” of the area number 11 of the middle reel 2C, and the right on the winning line L1 When the “banana” in the area number 7 of the reel 2R is stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated by the control based on the notification data, and then on the winning line L1. , “Black 7” of area number 10 of the left reel 2L, “black 7” of area number 13 of the middle reel 2C, and “black 7” of area number 9 of the right reel 2R are stopped, that is, “black” which is a specific appearance 7-black 7-black 7 "will be stopped.

  Further, the post-notification data used after the control based on the notification data among the success A data is “19” for the left reel 2L as the number-of-frames data, as in the next preparation of the success A data of FIG. "19" is determined for the middle reel 2C and "19" is determined for the right reel 2R. Thereby, the symbol that was stopped immediately before the control based on the success A data is started is stopped. For example, when “melon-melon-banana” is stopped, the control based on the success A data is started, and “black 7-black 7-black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 by the control based on the notification data. If the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again by the control based on the post-notification data, the “melon” of the area number 8 of the left reel 2L and the area number of the middle reel 2C are again on the winning line L1. 11 “melon” and “banana” in the area number 7 of the right reel 2R are stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped.

  That is, when the start A 7 is operated and the success A data is used during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game, After “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped on the winning line L1, it is rotated again, and “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on the winning line L1. The eyes “black 7-black 7-black 7” are stopped.

  As for the notification data of the success B data, “10” for the left reel 2L, “7” for the middle reel 2C, and “7” for the right reel 2R as the frame number data, as in the success derivation of the success B data of FIG. 9 "is defined. Also, post-notification data used after control based on the notification data among the success B data is “11” for the left reel 2L as the number-of-frame data, as in the next preparation of the success B data of FIG. “14” is determined for the middle reel 2C and “12” is determined for the right reel 2R. Thus, when the success B data is used by operating the start switch 7 during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. , “White 7-White 7-White 7”, which is a specific result on the winning line L1, is stopped and then rotated again, and “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on the winning line L1. “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped above L2.

  The notice data includes the pre-notification data for rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R at a lower speed than usual, and the symbols specified from the frame number data after taking over the rotation from the pre-notification data and increasing the rotation speed. Notification data to be stopped on L1, and post-notification data to stop the symbol specified from the frame number data on the winning line L1 after rotating the reels 2L to 2R again at a low speed after stopping the symbol by the notification data. And data to be controlled during the operation reception period until a predetermined period (3 seconds, 3 seconds + α when the execution period is adjusted) elapses after the control based on the data is started.

  When the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period, half of the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated at a low speed by the pre-notification data. The remaining half of the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added (extended) to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R based on the post-notification data is rotated at a low speed. The period during which the control is performed based on the notification data is configured to be constant regardless of the value of the period adjustment counter.

  As for the notice data of the notice A data, as the number of frames data, “2” for the left reel 2L, “1” for the middle reel 2C, and “1” for the right reel 2R, as in the notice derivation of the notice A data of FIG. 2 "is defined. Further, the post-notification data used after the control based on the notification data among the notification A data is “19” for the left reel 2L as the frame number data, as in the next preparation of the notification A data of FIG. "20" is determined for the middle reel 2C and "19" is determined for the right reel 2R. As a result, when the notice switch A is used by operating the start switch 7 during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. , “Black 7” of area number 10 of the left reel 2L, “banana” of area number 12 of the middle reel 2C, and “black 7” of area number 9 of the right reel 2R are stopped, that is, “black 7-banana-black 7” ”Is stopped, and“ black 7-black 7-black 7 ”is stopped in the reverse V-shape which is the notice notice.

  For the notification data of the notice B data, as frame number data, “10” for the left reel 2L, “8” for the middle reel 2C, and “8” for the right reel 2R as the notice derivation of the notice B data in FIG. 9 "is defined. Further, post-notification data used after control based on the notification data in the advance notice B data is “11” for the left reel 2L as frame number data, as in the next preparation of the advance notice B data in FIG. "13" is determined for the middle reel 2C and "12" is determined for the right reel 2R. Thus, when the notice B data is used by operating the start switch 7 during the freeze started when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. , "White 7-Strawberry-White 7" is stopped on the winning line L1, and "White 7-White 7-White 7" is stopped at the V-shaped notice, and the winning line is rotated again. “Mellon-melon-banana” is stopped on L1, and “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is stopped above the winning line L2.

  The failure data includes the pre-notification data for rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R at a lower speed than normal, and the symbols specified from the frame number data after taking over the rotation from the pre-notification data and increasing the rotation speed. The notification data to be stopped on L1 and the post-notification data to which the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again at a low speed after the symbols are stopped by the notification data and then the normal reel control is shifted to are included.

  When the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period, half of the period according to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R is rotated at a low speed by the pre-notification data. The remaining half of the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added (extended) to the period during which each of the reels 2L to 2R based on the post-notification data is rotated at a low speed. The period during which the control is performed based on the notification data is configured to be constant regardless of the value of the period adjustment counter.

  Of the failure data, for the notification data, “4” for the left reel 2L, “4” for the middle reel 2C, and “4” for the right reel 2R are determined as the frame number data. As a result, out of the success A data and the success B data, the outcomes other than the specific outcome that can be stopped by executing the control based on the notification data are stopped. For example, the “melon” of area number 8 on the left reel 2L, the “melon” of area number 11 of the middle reel 2C, and the “banana” of area number 7 of the right reel 2R are stopped on the winning line L1, that is, “melon-melon” When the “banana” is stopped, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, the “melon” of the area number 12 of the left reel 2L and the “melon” of the area number 15 of the middle reel 2C are placed on the pay line L1. The “banana” in the area number 11 of the right reel 2R is stopped, that is, “melon-melon-banana” is stopped.

  As described above, the initial preparation data, the success A data, and the success B data start the control based on the control data after rotating the reels 2L to 2R to stop the symbols based on the frame number data. Data for controlling the operation reception period when a predetermined period has elapsed.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the control based on the initial preparation data is executed. FIG. 33A shows a case where there is no operation to the start switch 7 during the operation reception period, and FIG. ) Indicates when the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period. In FIG. 33, from the top, the status of rotation / stop of the reels 2L to 2R and the availability of operation acceptance are shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33A, a case where there is no operation on the start switch 7 during the operation reception period will be described. When the control based on the initial preparation data is started, the control specified by the frame number data is stopped after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated at a high speed within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

  When the predetermined timing at which a predetermined period (2.5 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the control based on the initial preparation data after each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped is determined YES in Ss10 of FIG. Then, it is controlled in an operation reception period for receiving an operation to the start switch 7 for a predetermined period (2.5 seconds), and the operation can be received. When an operation to the start switch 7 is not accepted during the operation acceptance period and the operation acceptance period ends (YES in Ss12 in FIG. 30), the control based on the initial preparation data ends, and the notice lottery in Ss04 in FIG. In accordance with the result of the success number lottery in Ss05, control based on the control data of the notice pattern is started when it is decided that there is a notice, and control of the success pattern when the number of successes is decided to be 1 or more without notice. Control based on data is started, and when the number of successes is determined to be 0 without notice, control based on the control data of the failure pattern is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (b), a case where the start switch 7 is operated during the operation reception period will be described. As described above, first, after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the control specified by the frame number data is stopped, and the operation reception period is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter. Controlled and ready for operation. When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted during the operation acceptance period (YES in Ss11 in FIG. 30), the control based on the initial preparation data ends at that timing, the preliminary lottery in Ss04 in FIG. 30, and the success in Ss05. The next control data corresponding to the result of the lottery lottery, in which the period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period, is set in Ss13 of FIG. 30, and control based on the control data is performed. Is started.

  That is, initial preparation data that can be executed for 5 seconds is set at the start of the freeze, but when an operation is accepted during the operation reception period, the control based on the initial preparation data is terminated at that timing, and up to 5 seconds. Control based on the next control data added to the basic period is started. That is, when an operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the initial preparation data is truncated and shortened at that timing, while the control based on the next control data in which the shortened period is added to the basic period is performed. Newly set and started.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when control based on success A data is executed as an example of success data and advance notice data. In FIG. 34, the state of rotation / stop of the reels 2L to 2R and whether or not an operation can be accepted are shown from the top.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34A, a description will be given of a case where control based on success A data is started without an operation being accepted. Control is performed to rotate the reels 2L to 2R at low speed based on the pre-notification data until a predetermined pre-notification period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the control based on the success A data is started.

  Further, after the pre-notification period elapses until a predetermined notification period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the rotation speed of the reels 2L to 2R is increased after the frame speed data based on the notification data. Control for stopping the specified symbol is performed.

  Further, after the notification period has elapsed and before a predetermined post-notification period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the number-of-frames data after the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again at a low speed again based on the post-notification data. Control for stopping the symbol specified from the above is performed.

  Furthermore, when the predetermined timing at which a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the control based on the success A data is reached, it is determined as YES in Ss10 of FIG. 2 seconds) It is controlled in the operation reception period to be received, and the operation reception is possible. When an operation to the start switch 7 is not accepted during the operation acceptance period and the operation acceptance period ends (YES in Ss12 of FIG. 30), the control based on the success A data ends and the control based on the success pattern is determined. When the number of successful times has not been executed yet, control based on the success pattern control data is newly set and started.When executed for the number of successful times, control based on the failure pattern control data is newly performed Set and started.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 34B and 34C, the control based on the success A data is started by accepting the operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to time A. Explain when. FIG. 34 (b) shows a case where the operation is not accepted during the control operation acceptance period based on the success A data, and FIG. 34 (c) shows an operation during the control operation acceptance period based on the success A data. It shows when it was accepted.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. When the control based on the success A data is started by accepting the operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to the time A, half of the time A is added in the first half of the notification, and the time A Success A data including the pre-notification data and the post-notification data in which the remaining half is added to the post-notification period is set. That is, success A data is set in which the execution time of the control based on the pre-notification data and the execution time of the control based on the post-notification data are each increased by A / 2 from the time of FIG. Production control is performed. Therefore, the control based on the success A data is started when the operation is accepted when the value of the period adjustment counter is the value corresponding to the time A, and the control based on the success A data is started without accepting the operation. It starts earlier than time A, but the end timing is the same as the timing at which the control based on the success A data ends without accepting the operation.

  In addition, when control reaches the predetermined timing after the time A is added to the predetermined period (3 seconds) after the control based on the success A data is started, it is determined YES in Ss10 of FIG. 30 and starts. Control is performed during an operation reception period in which an operation to the switch 7 is received for a predetermined period (2 seconds), and the operation can be received.

  In Ss15 of FIG. 30, information for specifying that the success A data has been set, a period from the start of the control based on the notification data of the success A data to the notification timing at which the symbol is stopped (1 second). + A / 2), and a process for transmitting an operation time command including information for which the period until the operation start timing at which the operation reception period is started is (3 seconds + A) to the sub-control unit 91. .

  When the operation acceptance period ends and the control based on the success A data ends, the control based on the control data of the success pattern or the failure pattern is newly set and started according to the number of successes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34 (c), a description will be given of a case where an operation is accepted in the control operation acceptance period based on the success A data. Similarly to FIG. 34B, the execution time of the control based on the pre-notification data and the success A data in which the execution time of the control based on the post-notification data is extended by A / 2 are set, and the reel effect control is performed. Done. In addition, after the control based on the success A data is started, the operation reception period is controlled when a predetermined timing at which the time obtained by adding the time A to the predetermined period (3 seconds) has been reached.

  When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted during the operation acceptance period (YES in Ss11 of FIG. 30), the control based on the success A data is completed at that timing, and the control data corresponds to the number of successes. The next control data in which a period corresponding to the value of the period adjustment counter is added to the execution period is set in Ss13 of FIG. 30, and control based on the control data is started.

  In FIG. 34C, the operation is accepted when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to time B. That is, when control based on the next control data is started by accepting an operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to time B, half of time B is added during the previous period of notification, The next control data including the pre-notification data and the post-notification data in which the remaining half of the time B is added to the post-notification period is set. In other words, the control data obtained by extending the control execution time based on the pre-notification data and the control execution time based on the post-notification data by B / 2 is set, and the reel effect control is performed. Therefore, the control based on the next control data is started earlier by the time B than when no operation is performed, but the end timing is the same as when the operation is not performed.

  When the control based on the success B data is executed, the control similar to the control described for the success A data is performed except that the frame number data different from the success A data is used and a different symbol is stopped. . In addition, when the control based on the advance notice A data and the advance notice B data is executed, the control described for the success A data is the same as that described above, except that the number of frames different from the success A data is used and a different symbol is stopped. Similar control is performed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the control based on the failure data is executed. FIG. 35A shows the time when the control based on the failure data is started without accepting the operation. (B) shows the time when the control based on the success A data is started by accepting the operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to the time A. Note that, in the control based on the failure data, since it is not controlled during the operation reception period, FIG. 35 shows the state of rotation / stop of the reels 2L to 2R.

  First, referring to FIG. 35 (a), reels 2L to 2R are based on pre-notification data until a predetermined pre-notification period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the control based on failure data is started. Is controlled to rotate at a low speed.

  Further, after the pre-notification period elapses until a predetermined notification period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the rotation speed of the reels 2L to 2R is increased after the frame speed data based on the notification data. Control for stopping the specified symbol is performed.

  In addition, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated again at a low speed based on the post-notification data and the initial position return is performed between the elapse of the notification period and the elapse of a predetermined post-notification period (for example, 1 second). After the control, the initial position notification control is performed, and then the control for shifting to the normal rotation which is the normal reel control is performed. Note that the initial position return control and the initial position notification control are the same controls as those described in the first embodiment. After the initial position notification control, as shown in FIG. 35, the operation is shifted to the constant speed rotation, and at this time, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Next, a description will be given with reference to FIG. When control based on failure data is started by accepting an operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to time A, half of time A is added during the first half of the notification, and the rest of time A Failure data including each of the pre-notification data and the post-notification data in which half is added to the post-notification period is set. In other words, failure data in which the execution time of the control based on the pre-notification data and the execution time of the control based on the post-notification data are each increased by A / 2 from the time of FIG. Control is performed. For this reason, the control based on the failure data by accepting the operation when the value of the period adjustment counter is a value corresponding to the time A is greater than the control starting based on the failure data without accepting the operation. However, the start timing is the same as the timing at which the control based on the failure data ends without accepting the operation. Further, when control based on post-notification data is performed, as in FIG. 35 (a), after initial position return control is performed, initial position notification control is performed and then normal rotation, which is normal reel control, is performed. Control for shifting is performed. Note that in Ss15 of FIG. 30, the period from the start of control based on information for specifying failure data and notification data of failure data to the notification timing at which the symbol is stopped is (1 second + A / 2) A process for transmitting the operation command including the information to the sub-control unit 91 is performed.

  Control data used during freezing is stored in the ROM 41b on the main control unit 41 side. Further, the control data (first preparation data, success derivation of success data, next preparation of success data, derivation of advance notice data, next preparation of advance notice data) to stop after rotating each of the reels 2L to 2R is frame number data. Are stored only one by one. That is, data for repeatedly stopping “black 7-black 7-black 7” and “white 7-white 7-white 7”, which are specific outcomes during freeze, on the winning line L1, or a preliminary announcement outcome. Since there is little data for repeatedly stopping the reverse V-shaped “black 7-black 7-black 7” and the V-shaped “white 7-white 7-white 7”, it is not necessary to increase the storage capacity in the ROM 41b.

  Even if only one type of frame number data is stored for each control data, “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 at a high rate in the previous game as will be described later. Therefore, when success data is set during the freeze, “black 7-black 7-black 7” and “white 7-white 7-white 7” are stopped on the winning line L1 at a high rate, and a notice is given. When the data is set, “black 7-black 7-black 7” can be stopped in a reverse V-shape and “white 7-white 7-white 7” can be stopped in a V-shape at a high rate.

  It should be noted that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are unsteadyly rotated using the time preparation data, the notice A data, the notice B data, the success A data, the success B data, and the failure data so as to be different from the normal mode. It is called rotation, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in a normal manner is called steady rotation. Also in the second embodiment, the steady rotation and the unsteady rotation are performed in the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 25 before the special process having a different processing period executed according to a predetermined condition. By executing the process for performing the rotation, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate normally or unsteadily without being affected by the special process.

  As in the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40, and predetermined effect control processing is performed. That is, also in the second embodiment, the sub control unit 91 performs the AT control process described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, and performs the game effect, the navigation effect, and FIG. 29 according to the game state and the like. A game effect execution process for executing the various effects described with reference to is performed.

  Next, according to the second embodiment described above, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment described above can be obtained, and the following effects can be further achieved.

  (1) In the second embodiment described above, the control data of the success pattern, the notice pattern, or the failure pattern is composed of at least pre-notification data, notification data, and post-notification data. By adjusting (extending) the execution period of each subsequent data, control based on the control data of the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, or the failure pattern until the same common timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the reel effect control is started. Is made executable. For this reason, the control based on the control data of the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, or the failure pattern is compared with the one that adjusts only the execution period of one data constituting the control data of the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, or the failure pattern. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the execution time has changed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  (2) In the above-described second embodiment, the control data of the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, or the failure pattern is provided with the notice data for notifying whether the specific appearance or the advance notice is stopped, and the notice. Pre-notification data added before and after the data, and post-notification data, of which the pre-notification data and post-notification data differ from the notification data without adjusting the execution period of the notification data to which the player pays attention By adjusting (extending) each execution period, control based on the control data of the success pattern, notice pattern, or failure pattern is executed until the same common timing is reached regardless of the timing at which the reel effect control is started. It is possible. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the execution period of the control based on the control data of the success pattern, the notice pattern, or the failure pattern has changed, and as a result, it can make the player feel uncomfortable. Can be prevented.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

[Control after turning off during the freeze period]
In the embodiment described above, the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game is held until the end of the next game, and the initial positional relationship is specified from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. The relative positional relationship between the reels after temporarily stopping the particular event or the notice event during the freeze period (after the last temporary stop if stopped multiple times) The example of performing the initial position return control for returning to the initial position relationship has been described. However, it is not limited to the one that performs the initial position return control, and after the temporary exit such as the specific exit or the advance notice is temporarily stopped during the freeze period, if it is temporarily stopped a plurality of times, the last stop is temporarily stopped. What is necessary is just to perform predetermined control after the production (hereinafter referred to as final stop production) is completed, and for example, the control exemplified below may be performed.

(Modification 1)
In this modification, an example in which positional relationship change control is performed to change the positional relationship between the reels after the final stop effect during the freeze period so that the relative positional relationship between the reels becomes random will be described. In this example, it is not necessary to specify the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, and the reel stop position is held until the end of the next game before the reel effect control is performed. There is no need to do.

  In the present modification, as shown in FIG. 36, when the main CPU 41a performs control during the freeze period (freeze state), the main CPU 41a temporarily stops the output such as the specific appearance or the advance notice during the freeze period. At the stage before starting the reel effect control, a positional relationship determination process is performed to determine the positional relationship so that the positional relationship changed by the positional relationship change control after the final stop effect in the freeze period is random.

  In the positional relationship determination process, a change amount determination lottery is performed in which the change amount for the current position is randomly determined in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the change amount determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Specifically, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the left reel, and random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 997 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the middle reel. In the lottery used to determine the amount of change of the right reel, a random number updated in the range of 0 to 998 is used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, in the change amount determination lottery, 0 to 4 symbols are won in almost equal proportions as the change amount in any reel. Since the cycle is not synchronized, it is difficult to determine the same change amount as the change amount of each reel.

  The least common multiple that 997, 998, and 999, which are the total number of random numbers, is synchronized is 994010994. In this modification, each random number is updated for each timer interrupt process (main), and Since the interval is 0.56 ms and is updated about 1786 times per second, the next three random numbers will be synchronized after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually Since it is about 13 hours, the same combination of random numbers is not extracted during the day, and the change amount determination lottery is not performed. Each time the reel effect control is performed, the same change amount as the combination of change amounts of each reel is performed. The combination is difficult to determine.

  Then, the main CPU 41a determines the relative positional relationship between these three reels by performing each change amount determination lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control, and after the final stop effect, as shown in FIG. 36, position relationship change control for changing the relative position relationship of each reel based on the result of the change amount determination lottery. Do. In the positional relationship change control, the rotation speed of the left reel is changed until the positional relationship between the left reel and other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the left reel change amount determination lottery. After the control is slower than that of the reel, the speed is returned to the same speed as that of the other reels. Next, after controlling the rotation speed of the middle reel slower than the other reels until the positional relationship between the middle reel and the other reels is deviated by the number of symbols won in the middle reel change amount determination lottery, Return to the same speed as the rotation speed. Finally, until the positional relationship between the right reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the right reel change amount determination lottery, control the rotation speed of the right reel slower than other reels, Return to the same speed as the reel. Thereby, the positional relationship between the reels becomes a random positional relationship.

  Then, the main CPU 41a makes the positional relationship between the reels a random positional relationship by the positional relationship change control, then accelerates the rotational speed of all the reels, and when the constant rotational speed is reached as shown in FIG. Then, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Further, in the present modification, the sub CPU 91a performs control to change the visibility of the reels by performing on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control in the freeze period. The turn-on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control is performed according to the specified display position by specifying the display position of each reel when the reel is stopped from the reel stop command described above. It is supposed to be.

  During the reel production control, the reel LED 55 is sequentially turned off from the area corresponding to the upper symbol in accordance with the rotation of the reel, and the reel production control is performed in accordance with the timing at which the output is temporarily stopped. Control to turn on the LED 55 is performed. Next, during the positional relationship change control, the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are once turned off, and then the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are turned on when the relative positional relationship of each reel becomes a random positional relationship. After that, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated and all the reels are stopped by the stop operation, the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions is maintained. .

  As described above, in the slot machine of this modification, when performing reel effect control, the positional relationship is determined so that the relative positional relationship between the reels is random, and after the final stop effect, Before the operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship of the three reels is changed to a random positional relationship determined before the reel production control. Even when the reel effect control for temporarily stopping the outcome including the outcome and the advance notice is performed, the stop switches 8L and 8C are thereafter compared with the case where the reel effect control is not performed. After the operation of 8R becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel production control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed to a random positional relationship, that is, a positional relationship having no regularity. If the control is not performed, there will be no regularity that does not occur, and the game performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control is impaired. There is no end.

  Also, in this variation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed to a random positional relationship after the reel effect control is performed and the final stop effect is ended, regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game. By changing the reel production control, it is configured so that the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player so that the gameability of the slot machine is not impaired. The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing control for detecting the positional relationship between the reels, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected for all the reels.

  Further, in this modified example, the positional relationship determination process for determining the positional relationship so that the positional relationship changed by the positional relationship change control after the end of the reel rendering control is random at the stage before starting the reel rendering control. It is possible to perform freeze lottery, that is, a process for determining whether or not to perform reel effect control and a positional relationship determination process continuously without interposing reel effect control, The flow of processing can be simplified, and the positional relationship change control can be shifted immediately after the reel effect control is completed.

  In addition, in this modification, although it is the structure which performs a positional relationship determination process in the stage before starting reel production | presentation control, as shown in FIG. 39, a positional relationship determination process is performed after the start of reel production control, The configuration may be such that the positional relationship change control is performed based on the result. With such a configuration, the relative positional relationship between the reels used in the positional relationship change control is specified over the reel production control period. There is no need to retain the data. For example, even when the power is interrupted during the reel effect control period, the amount of data retained until the power is restored can be reduced.

  In addition, as in this modification, if the change amount determination lottery for determining the change amount with respect to the current position is determined for each reel in the positional relationship determination process, the reel change amount for changing the relative positional relationship. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a determination lottery is performed and control for immediately changing the positional relationship of the reels (control for shifting the change amount selected in the change amount determination lottery) is sequentially performed for each reel. By doing so, it is not necessary to maintain the amount of change for reels other than the reel whose position is changed by the positional relationship change control.

  Also, in this modification, after the reel effect control is performed and the final stop effect is finished, the positional relationship between one reel and the other reels is shifted by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. After controlling the reel rotation speed slower than other reels, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by control to return to the same speed as that of the other reels. One change time is determined based on a plurality of different change times, not the number of symbols, and the position relationship between one reel and the other reels is changed until the change time selected in the change amount determination lottery elapses. The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by controlling the rotation speed of the reels slower than that of the other reels and then returning the reels to the same speed as the rotation speeds of the other reels.

  In addition, after the reel production control, the acceleration of one reel is started and the other reels are accelerated until the positional relationship between the one reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of. Furthermore, the change amount determination lottery determines one change time from a plurality of different change times instead of the number of symbols, starts acceleration of one reel, and the positional relationship between one reel and another reel The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of acceleration of the other reels until the change time won in the change amount determination lottery elapses.

  In addition, in this modification, after the final stop effect is finished, a change amount determination lottery that randomly determines a change amount for the current position for each reel in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols is performed. The relative positional relationship of these three reels is determined, and the relationship with the positional relationship of each reel becomes more irregular, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R When activated, the relative positional relationship between the reels can be made more irregular.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of random numbers is a random number that is relatively prime, the update period between the random numbers is the least common multiple of the total number of random numbers. Thus, the amount of change in each reel can be more varied than in the case where random numbers having the same period are used. As a result, even when the reel effect control for temporarily stopping the turn is performed, the positional relationship in the reel effect control is maintained when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated. Avoid as much as possible.

  In this modification, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, it is difficult to determine the same change amount as the change amount of each reel by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. Although it is configured, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if random numbers with the same update cycle are used, the start value is randomly changed for each cycle for each random number Even when the same change amount is not easily determined as the change amount of each reel by using a random number or by shifting the timing for performing the change amount determination lottery of each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the total amount of each random number is a relatively random number, so that the amount of change in each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the variation in the reel, each time the reel effect control is performed, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the same change amount combination is determined as the combination of the change amounts of each reel. Each time the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated, the positional relationship between the reels is prevented from being biased, that is, the positional relationship after reel effect control is not likely to become the same positional relationship. it can.

  In addition, in this modification, it is a configuration that takes longer than the general game shop business hours to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, the same player plays a game on the same day, Even when the reel effect control is performed twice or more, the positional relationship after the reel effect control is not the same. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the change amount determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, a configuration in which three random numbers are not synchronized more than once during one game, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R each time the reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when the operation is activated, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect control is not likely to be the same positional relationship.

  In this modification, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, each reel change is performed every time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. Although it is difficult to determine the same change amount combination as the amount combination, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update cycle is used, the change is performed every time the reel effect control is performed. By shifting the timing for performing the amount determination lottery (for example, when the change amount determination lottery is performed before the reel effect control, the change amount determination lottery is performed after the reel effect control when the reel effect control is performed next time). Each time the reel effect control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same change amount combination as the change amount combination of each reel. Even if obtained the same effect as described above.

  In addition, the change amount determination lottery of this modification is configured such that the change amount for the current position is randomly determined for each reel in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols corresponding to the pull-in range. The range of the change amount is not limited to the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols exemplified above, and a range beyond that may be applied, or a range less than that, for example, 0 A range assigned to one symbol may be applied. As described above, the range determined when the change time is determined by the change amount determination lottery can be arbitrarily selected as in the case of the number of symbols.

  Moreover, in this modification, the relative positional relationship between these three reels after the end of the final stop effect is achieved by performing a change amount determination lottery that randomly determines a change amount for the current position for each reel. Although the configuration is determined, a relative drawing of these three reels after the final stop effect is completed by performing a lottery that randomly determines the positional relationship of the other reels with respect to any one reel for each remaining reel. It is good also as a structure by which various positional relationships are determined.

  In addition, a positional relationship determination lottery for randomly selecting a positional relationship from a plurality of relative positional relationships that are determined in advance so as to be different from each other is performed, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the reel production control. It is good also as a structure determined as a relative positional relationship of three reels. For example, as shown in FIG. 40, the relative position for each symbol unit of the middle reel when the left reel is the reference, and the relative position for each symbol unit of the right reel when the left reel and the middle reel are the reference What is necessary is just to determine any one positional relationship from these positional relationships by the positional relationship determination lottery. In this way, a positional relationship determination lottery for randomly selecting one of the positional relationships from the relative positional relationships between the reels that are determined in advance so as to be different is performed, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the end of the final stop effect. Since the relative positional relationship between these three reels is determined, the positional relationship between the reels when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated after the end of the final stop effect is biased. Can be prevented.

(Modification 2)
In the present modification, an example will be described in which an acceleration time determination process is performed in which the acceleration time required for acceleration control from the end of the final stop effect during the freeze period to the constant speed rotation is randomly determined for each reel. As shown in FIG. 41, when controlling the freeze period (freeze state), the main CPU 41a, at the stage before starting the reel effect control during the freeze period, after the end of the final stop effect in the freeze period, Acceleration time determination processing is performed in which acceleration time required for acceleration control until constant speed rotation is determined randomly for each reel.

  In the acceleration time determination process, an acceleration time determination lottery is performed in which the acceleration time of each reel is randomly determined in the range of T (shortest acceleration time) +0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms. In this modification, the reel takes about 38 ms to move by one symbol during constant speed rotation where the stop operation is effective. Therefore, by selecting one of these acceleration times, constant speed rotation is achieved. At this point, a maximum of four symbol shifts will occur.

  In the acceleration time determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. Specifically, as in the change amount determination lottery, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the left reel, and 0 to 997 in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the middle reel. In the lottery for determining the acceleration time of the right reel, random numbers updated in the range of 0 to 998 are used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as with the change amount determination lottery, in the acceleration time determination lottery, T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms are won in almost equal proportions for all reels. Thus, since the update cycle of random numbers is not synchronized, the same acceleration time is difficult to be determined as the acceleration time of each reel.

  Similarly to the change amount determination lottery, the next three random numbers will synchronize after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually around 13 hours. The same random number combination is not extracted and the change amount determination lottery is not performed, and each time the reel effect control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same acceleration time combination as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel.

  The main CPU 41a determines the acceleration times of these three reels by performing respective acceleration time determination lotteries.

  Next, after the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control and ends the final stop effect, as shown in FIG. 41, the main CPU 41a performs acceleration control for accelerating each reel to constant speed rotation based on the result of the acceleration time determination lottery. . In the acceleration control, after starting the acceleration of each reel, control is performed to accelerate each reel so as to reach a constant speed rotation in an acceleration time determined for each reel.

  Thereby, the timing which reaches | attains constant speed rotation between each reel becomes random, and also the positional relationship of each reel arranged in reel effect control also becomes a random positional relationship.

  The main CPU 41a validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed by the acceleration control.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the present modification, the reel effect control is performed to temporarily stop the game during the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed after the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect with an impact in the manner of reel change during the freeze period.

  Also, in this modification, after the final stop effect during the freeze period, the acceleration time until the constant speed rotation is changed randomly, so that the symbols exceeding the pull-in range are drawn depending on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration. Since it is difficult to predict the timing at which it can be inserted, even when the reel effect control for temporarily stopping the outcome is performed, the stop switches 8L and 8C are thereafter compared to the case where such a reel effect control is not performed. After the operation of 8R becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  In addition, in this modified example, after the final stop effect in the freeze period is finished, the acceleration time until constant speed rotation is randomly changed for each reel, and not only the timing to reach constant speed rotation In addition, although the positional relationship between the reels arranged in the reel production control is also a random positional relationship, it may be configured to apply one randomly determined acceleration time as the acceleration time of all reels, Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to predict the timing at which a symbol exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in depending on the elapsed time from the start of acceleration of the reel. Then, as compared with the case where the reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the reel is stopped. There is no such thing as the difficulty of the work is extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Moreover, in this modification, although it is a structure provided with a some reel, even if it is a case where the reel effect control by which a specific symbol is displayed over a predetermined period in the structure provided with only one reel, Predict the timing at which symbols beyond the pull-in range can be pulled in based on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration by adopting a configuration that randomly changes the acceleration time until the reel starts to rotate at a constant speed. Therefore, even when the reel effect control is performed, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, the reel stop operation is performed after the reel effect control is performed. The difficulty is never extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Further, in this modified example, the player can perform the reel effect control by randomly changing the acceleration time of each reel after the reel effect control regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game. Since it is a configuration that does not impair the playability of the slot machine that the display result is derived by technical intervention by, without performing control to detect the positional relationship between each reel after the game starts, That is, the reel effect control can be started immediately without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  Further, in this modified example, an acceleration time determination process for randomly determining an acceleration time applied to the acceleration control after the end of the reel effect control is performed at the stage before starting the reel effect control. The lottery, that is, the process for determining whether or not to perform reel effect control and the acceleration time determination process can be performed continuously without interposing the reel effect control, and the process flow can be simplified. Immediately after the end of the reel effect control, it is possible to shift to acceleration control.

  In this modification, the acceleration time determination process is performed at the stage before the reel effect control is started. However, after the reel effect control is started, the acceleration time determination process is performed, and the acceleration control is performed based on the result. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store data for specifying the acceleration time of each reel used in the acceleration control over the period of the reel effect control. For example, the reel effect control Even when the power is interrupted during the period, it is possible to reduce the amount of data held until the power is restored.

  Further, in this modification, the change amount determination lottery for randomly determining the acceleration time of each reel is performed for each reel, whereby the acceleration times of these three reels after the final stop effect are determined. Thus, the relationship with the acceleration time of each reel becomes more irregular, and the time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation can be made more irregular.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of each random number uses a random number, the update period of each random number is the least common multiple of the total number of each random number. As compared with the case where random numbers having the same period are used, the acceleration time in each reel can be more varied.

  In this modified example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, it is difficult to determine the same acceleration time as the acceleration time of each reel by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. Although it is configured, for example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, even if random numbers with the same update cycle are used, the start value is changed randomly for each cycle for each random number Even when the same acceleration time is not easily determined as the acceleration time of each reel by using random numbers or by shifting the timing for determining the acceleration time of each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, so that the acceleration time for each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the fact that each reel effect control is performed, the rate at which the same acceleration time combination is determined as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel can be reduced, so that the reel effect control is performed. Every time the reel effect control is performed, the acceleration time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation is biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in this modification, it is a configuration that takes longer than the general game shop business hours to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, the same player plays a game on the same day, Even when the reel effect control is performed twice or more, the combination of the acceleration times after the reel effect control is not the same combination. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, if three random numbers are not synchronized twice or more during one game, acceleration is performed after reel effect control every time reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the acceleration time from the start to the constant speed rotation from being biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination.

  In this modification, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, each reel is accelerated each time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. Although it is difficult to determine the same acceleration time combination as the time combination, for example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, acceleration is performed every time the reel effect control is performed even when the same update cycle is used. By shifting the timing for performing the time determination lottery (for example, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed before the reel effect control, the acceleration time determination lottery is performed after the reel effect control when the reel effect control is performed next time). Each time reel effect control is performed, the same acceleration time combination is determined as the combination of acceleration times of each reel. Even when a is hardly configured to obtain the same effect as described above.

  Further, in the acceleration time determination lottery of the present modification, the ranges of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms that cause the shift of the acceleration time for each reel corresponding to the pull-in range of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 symbols. However, the range of acceleration time is not limited to the range of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T / E + 152 ms exemplified above, and a range beyond that may be applied. However, a smaller range, for example, a range assigned to 0 to 38 ms may be applied.

  In addition, in this modification, the acceleration time determination lottery that randomly determines the acceleration time for each reel is performed, whereby the acceleration times of these three reels after the end of the final stop effect are determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the acceleration time of these three reels after the reel effect control is determined by performing a lottery that randomly determines the difference of the acceleration time of the other reels with respect to the acceleration time of any one reel. .

  In addition, a lottery for determining an acceleration time combination for randomly selecting one of the combinations of acceleration times for each reel, which is determined in advance so as to be different, is performed, and the final stop effect ends based on the combination of the selected acceleration times A configuration may be adopted in which acceleration control of these three reels is performed later. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the acceleration time for each of the reels from being biased after the reel effect control.

[About control data of success pattern and notice pattern]
In the above-described embodiment, the success data and the advance notice data differ only in the frame number data depending on the type thereof, and the other control contents are described as an example in which the same control as the success A pattern illustrated in FIG. 23 and the like is performed. did. However, the success data and the advance notice data are not limited to this, and depending on whether the success data is the success A data, the success B data, the advance notice A data, or the advance notice B data, not only the frame number data but also the variable display mode May be different. The fluctuation display mode refers to the operation mode of the reel from the rotation of the reel to the temporary stop during the freeze period. For example, the rotation start timing, the order of the reels to start the rotation, the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation stop ( This refers to the timing of temporary stop), the order of reels to stop rotation, and the like. More specifically, with regard to the notice pattern, for example, for the notice A data, the fluctuation display mode is determined so that the steady rotation and the rotation direction are the same, but the steady rotation and the unsteady rotation are performed at a lower speed than the steady rotation. Regarding the data, the fluctuation display mode may be determined so that the steady rotation and the rotation speed are the same, but the unsteady rotation is performed in the opposite direction to the steady rotation. Thereby, it is possible to predict whether the pattern is a success pattern or a notice pattern before it is temporarily stopped by the variable display mode during the freeze period. In addition, as shown in FIG. 26 and the like, the ratio of granting the Navistock as a privilege varies depending on the type of success pattern, and the success pattern thereafter depends on the type of notice pattern as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. The ratio at which the reel effect control is executed is different. For this reason, it is possible to indirectly report the ratio at which the navigation stock is given depending on the type of the variable display mode, and the ratio at which the reel effect control based on the success pattern is subsequently executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable display mode during the freeze period, to change the expectation according to the type of the variable display mode, and to improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, in the unsteady rotation process during the freeze period, the rotation speed and the rotation direction are changed to be different from those at the time of steady rotation, and the unsteady rotation is performed to give the player a sense of incongruity. Since the rotation is unsteady, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reel effect from being lowered.

  In addition, depending on whether the data is success A data, success B data, notice A data, or notice B data, the start timing of the operation reception period, the length of the operation reception period, and the reel effect based on the data The length of the period during which the control is performed may be different.

[After reel production control by notice pattern]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which after the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed, the ratio of the reel effect control by the success pattern is higher than when the reel effect control is not executed. However, after execution of the reel effect control based on the notice pattern, not only the ratio at which the reel effect control based on the success pattern is executed, but also other events may be made different. For example, even when the reel production control by the same success pattern is executed, the reel production control by the warning pattern is executed without being executed after the reel production control by the warning pattern is executed. The privilege may be given so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher, such as a case where the navigation stock is given as a privilege at a higher rate than when the player is made. In addition, regarding the mode of effects (for example, FIG. 29 (f) and (h)) performed during the reel effect control, whether the reel effect control based on the notice pattern or the reel effect control based on the success pattern is being performed. You may make it differ. For example, when the reel production control by the success pattern is being performed, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 29 (f) and (h), whereas when the reel production control by the notice pattern is being performed, FIG. 29 (h) A message such as “Next time is a chance!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as an effect corresponding to the above, and a message such as “Expect a lever operation!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as an effect corresponding to FIG. You may make it display.

[About lottery of notice pattern]
In the first embodiment described above, an example in which it is determined that the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed in the pattern lottery, and the ratio that is determined when the reel effect control by the successful pattern is executed in the subsequent pattern lottery is increased. In the second embodiment, an example in which the number of times the reel effect control based on the success pattern is executed is increased by determining that the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is performed in the notice lottery has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first embodiment, it is determined that the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed in the notice lottery, so that the number of times the reel effect control by the success pattern is executed is increased. Well, in the second embodiment, the reel effect by the notice pattern in the pattern lottery By being determined to perform a control, it may be the proportion that is determined to execute the reel performance control becomes high due to successful pattern in subsequent pattern lottery.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the lottery for the success pattern is performed according to the lottery result after the lottery for the notice pattern is performed has been described. However, when it is determined that the reel effect control based on the success pattern is executed, it is determined that the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed at a higher rate than when the reel effect control based on the success pattern is not determined. May be. Further, it may be determined that the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed at a higher rate as the number of times the reel effect control based on the success pattern is executed is larger. That is, after a lottery for a successful pattern, a lottery for a notice pattern may be performed according to the lottery result. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to notify that the noticeable number is stopped during the freeze period, and that the specific number of items is stopped and navigation stock is given at a higher rate thereafter. Therefore, during the freeze period, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for not only stopping the specific appearance but also stopping the advance appearance. As a result, since the variation of the opportunity which makes a player have an expectation increases, the interest of the game during the freeze period can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the example in which the success pattern is determined to be higher in the next pattern lottery after the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed has been described. However, the success pattern is determined. The period during which the ratio is increased is not limited to this, and the ratio determined as a successful pattern in the pattern lottery for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed may be increased. Further, after the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed, the ratio determined as the success pattern in the pattern lottery during the freeze period may be increased. In addition, as the number of times that the reel effect control by the notice pattern is executed increases, the ratio determined as a successful pattern in the pattern lottery during the freeze period may be increased.

  In the above-described second embodiment, an example is described in which, when it is determined to execute reel effect control based on the notice pattern, reel effect control based on the notice pattern is executed next to the initial preparation data. The timing of executing the reel production control by the above is not limited to this, but the timing of executing the reel production control by the notice pattern (for example, how many times the control data is set after the reel production control by the initial preparation data is finished) You may make it determine at random using a random number etc.

[Freezing period]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a freeze can occur in a specific game in the BB. However, the freezing possible period is not limited to a specific game in the BB, but a game won by a predetermined lottery in the BB. It may be generated in the game, and is not limited to the game that can be generated during the BB, but may be generated in a game won in a normal lottery state or a predetermined lottery during RT. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the freeze occurs at the start of the game is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first stop or the second stop is performed, or the third stop is performed and the game is played. It may be generated between the end of the game and the start of the next game.

  In addition, when the freeze occurrence possible period is set to the period from the start to the end of the game, the winning situation of the game that generates the freeze depends on the operation procedure (the operation order of the stop switches 8L to 8C or the operation timing). When the winning situation is such that the degree of advantage for the player (whether or not a prize is generated, the number of payout medals, the degree of advantage of the controlled gaming state, etc.) is different, a predetermined timing after the game is over (game end) Freeze may be generated from the time of the next game start etc.). As a result, when the freeze is generated during the period from the start to the end of the game, the player does not notice that the freeze has actually ended, and the operation (stop switches 8L to 8C) causes the game to be mistakenly advanced. ) May be performed, and as a result, the inconvenience that the result of the game is a result less advantageous to the player can be prevented.

[Conditions for non-freezing]
In the above-described embodiment, even if the game is a specific game, if the special game that will always give the navigation stock in the previous game is won, it is determined as NO in S01 of the freeze-related process at the start of the specific game. An example where no freeze occurs is described. However, the condition for not causing the freeze even in the specific game is not limited to the special winning, but the fact that “White 7-White 7-White 7” was stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and won the special. It is good also as conditions. Further, as a condition for preventing the freeze even in the specific game, “white 7-white 7-black BAR” may not be stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. As a result, even if a freeze occurs thereafter and the reel effect control is performed using the control data of the success pattern shown in FIG. 21, a specific appearance such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is obtained. The occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to feel distrust due to not being stopped can be reduced or eliminated.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a freeze is not generated by determining NO in S01 or the like in the freeze-related process when the condition for non-freezing is satisfied has been described even in a specific game. It may be one in which the conditions for occurrence are not set. For example, even if “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and a special winning is made, it is determined as YES in the freeze-related process S01 and the like to generate a freeze. You may make it obtain. In this case, if a freeze occurs and reel effect control is performed using the control data of the success pattern shown in FIG. 21, a specific result such as “black 7-black 7-black 7” is displayed. Is not stopped, causing inconvenience that causes the player to feel distrust, but each time the reel effect control by the success pattern is performed, the player is given a privilege of Navistock. Can improve the interest of

  Also, in the first embodiment, when “White 7-White 7-White 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and a special prize is won, it is determined as YES in S01 of the freeze related processing. After the processing of S02 and S03, the pattern lottery is performed in S09, the command for specifying the lottery result after the special winning is sent in S11, and whether the lottery result is a successful pattern in S12. When it is determined in S12 that the pattern is a success pattern, the process proceeds to S09 again. When it is determined that the pattern is not a success pattern in S12, the freeze-related process is terminated. (Control) may not be substantially executed. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 performs the AT lottery shown in FIGS. 26 to 28 every time a command of a success pattern is received as a command for specifying the lottery result after the special winning, and the navigation stock is displayed. When an unsuccessful pattern command is received, an effect of notifying the total number of navigation stocks acquired so far may be executed. Further, in the second embodiment, when “White 7-White 7-White 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and a special prize is won, YES is determined in Ss01 of the freeze related processing. After performing the processing of Ss02 and Ss03, the success number lottery is performed in Ss05, the command for specifying the number of success after the special prize is sent in Ss07, and the freeze related processing is terminated. Freezing (reel effect control during freezing) may not be substantially executed. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT lottery (for example, AT lottery when the sixth AT lottery condition is satisfied) for the number of successes based on a command for specifying the number of successes after the special winning. You may make it perform the production | presentation which gives stock and alert | reports the total number of the acquired navigation stock number. This prevents the reel production control from causing distrust to the player because “white 7-white 7-black BAR” was not stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. However, since a privilege is given in the specific game, the degree of advantage for the player can be made the same as when “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game. .

[Freeze after specific display result stops]
When “White 7-White 7-White 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 in the previous game and a special game is won, a freezing occurs in the subsequent specific game, and variation control is performed according to the success pattern. In order to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to feel distrust because the specific outcome such as “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is not temporarily stopped on the winning line L1. In the example described above, the main control unit 41 is controlled so as not to generate a freeze, and the sub-control unit 91 is controlled not to perform a freeze-related effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows.

  When the variation control is once performed according to the stop pattern from “White 7-White 7-White 7”, the symbol combination corresponding to a specific appearance such as “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” on the winning line L1 In the next game in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped and it is informed that navigation stock is provided. If a decision to generate a freeze is made, a freeze may be generated based on the decision and various effects during the freeze may be executed.

  In the case of such a configuration, for example, “strawberry” in area number 8 of the right reel 2R in FIG. 3 is changed to “black 7 with strawberry”, for example, and “banana” in area number 15 is changed to “banana attached”, for example. In addition, “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7 with Strawberry”, “White” “7-white 7-black 7 with strawberry” may be set. As a result, when the variation control is once performed from “white 7-white 7-white 7” according to the stop pattern, “black 7-black 7-black 7” “white 7-white 7-” on the winning line L1. Even in a specific game, one of “White 7”, “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7 with Strawberry” and “White 7-White 7-Black 7 with Strawberry” is temporarily stopped and a navigation stock is given. be able to.

[Reel effect control pattern]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29B to 29J, as the reel effect control pattern during freezing, as soon as freezing is started, all the reels 2L to 2R are set to the normal state. The example has been described in which the reel effect control is performed at a speed different from the rotation speed, and the reel effect control by the success pattern is repeatedly performed until the failure pattern is determined. However, the pattern of the reel effect control during the freeze is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG.

  For example, during the freeze in the first embodiment, the number of times of performing the reel effect control by the success pattern, the number of times of performing the reel effect control by the notice pattern, and the number of times of performing the reel effect control by the failure pattern are determined. The reel effect control by the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, and the failure pattern may be performed by the number of times performed. Further, during the freeze in the second embodiment, the number of times of control by the success pattern, the number of times of control by the notice pattern, and the number of times of control by the failure pattern are determined. Control by each of the pattern, the notice pattern, and the failure pattern may be performed. In this case, when the control based on the failure pattern control data is performed, the winning line is returned to the state before the control is performed in the same manner as when the control based on the success pattern control data is performed. The number-of-frames data for returning the combination of symbols on L1 (for example, “17” is determined as the number of frames in the middle left and right) is included in the after-notification data of the failure pattern, and the after-notification data of the failure pattern When the control based on the failure pattern is performed, the symbol combination on the winning line L1 when the control based on the failure pattern control data ends is returned to the symbol combination before the failure pattern control is performed. . Thereby, even after the reel effect control by the failure pattern is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation that the reel effect control by the success pattern will be performed next.

  In addition, each of the reel production control from the start of the freeze until the control by the success, advance notice or failure pattern is started, the reel production control by the success pattern, the reel production control by the advance pattern, and the reel production control by the failure pattern. The present invention is not limited to the mode shown in FIG.

  For example, as reel effect control from the start of freezing to the start of success, advance notice, or failure pattern control, for example, only the right reel 2R is raised by one symbol from the state of FIG. After rotating to the state of FIG. 29 (c), all of the reels 2L to 2R may be rotated at a speed faster than the normal rotation speed.

  The reel effect control based on the success pattern and the notice pattern is not limited to temporarily stopping a predetermined symbol combination (such as a specific appearance) on the winning line L1, but the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the display window 3. Decrease the rotation speed when moving, and slowly move the symbol combination specified from the frame number data from the top to the bottom, and improve the rotation speed after it is not visible from the display window 3 and move it quickly. Such control may be repeatedly executed.

  The reel production control by the failure pattern is not limited to, for example, finely swinging the reel that has been stopped, but temporarily stops the combination of predetermined symbols (excluding specific appearances) in the same manner as the reel production control by the success pattern. After performing the control, the control connected to the normal reel control may be performed. Thereby, it will be specified whether it is a success pattern by the combination of the symbol etc. which are stopped once, and an interest can be improved.

  In addition, as the reel production control during the freeze, the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R may be started as long as it is not performed in the normal reel control, and the reels 2L to 2L as in the above-described embodiment may be used. The rotation of the reels 2L to 2R is not limited to the one that starts rotation of all the 2Rs at the same time. For example, the reels 2L to 2R may be rotated repeatedly up and down and then started to rotate.

[Operations that trigger the execution of the specified performance]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the predetermined effect is executed by receiving the operation to the start switch 7 once in the operation reception period during the freeze has been described. However, the operation accepting means for accepting an operation that triggers the execution of the predetermined effect is not limited to the start switch 7. For example, the operation is input to the MAXBET switch 6 in which an operation signal is input to the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91. An effect switch 56 to which a signal is input may be used. Note that when an operation reception unit that receives an operation signal is input to the sub-control unit 91 as an operation reception unit that receives an operation that triggers execution of a specific effect, for example, the operation signal is also transmitted to the main control unit 41. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be input.

  An execution trigger for a predetermined effect is established when an operation to one operation means is accepted a plurality of times (for example, a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period), or an operation for each of the plurality of operation means is accepted. It may be established by receiving an operation on each of the plurality of operation means in a predetermined procedure. Thereby, a variation can be given to the operation for executing the predetermined effect, and the interest of the game being frozen can be improved.

[When the operation that triggers the execution of the specified performance is not accepted]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S08 of FIG. 18 and the like, even when the operation is not accepted in the operation acceptance period, the process after S09 is performed, and the freeze period and control data are newly set. An example in which control data based on a success pattern or a notice pattern can also be set has been described. However, when an operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period, a freeze period or control data may not be newly set, or only control data based on a failure pattern in which the freeze end is determined may be set. In addition, during one freeze, the number of operations that are not accepted during the operation acceptance period is counted, and the number of operations that are counted when no operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period is a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 When the number of times has not reached, the processing from S09 is performed, and when the predetermined number of times has been reached, the freeze period or control data is not newly set, or the control is based on a failure pattern in which the freeze end is determined. Only data may be set. By comprising in this way, dissatisfaction with the player etc. who hold the annoying impression with respect to a freeze can be eliminated.

  As described above, when the operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period, the freeze period or control data is not newly set, or only the control data based on the failure pattern in which the freeze end is determined is set. Will no longer receive benefits such as Navistock. In order to eliminate such inconvenience, the degree of advantage for the player in granting the privilege may be the same as when the operation is accepted in a regular manner.

  For example, when an operation is not accepted in the operation acceptance period, or when the number of times of operation reaches a predetermined number, a pattern lottery is performed in S09 of FIG. 18, and a lottery result is specified after no operation in S11. A command is sent to determine whether or not the lottery result is a success pattern in S12. If it is determined in S12 that it is a success pattern, the process proceeds to S09 again, and if it is determined in S12 that it is not a success pattern. The freeze-related processing may be terminated, and the freeze (reel effect control during the freeze) may not be substantially executed. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 performs the AT lottery shown in FIGS. 26 to 28 every time a successful pattern command is received as a command for specifying the lottery result after no operation, and the navigation stock is displayed. When an unsuccessful pattern command is received, an effect of notifying the total number of navigation stocks acquired so far may be executed. Thereby, even when the operation is not accepted during the operation acceptance period, the degree of advantage for the player in granting the privilege can be made the same as when the operation is properly accepted.

[Types of control data to be set]
In the second embodiment described above, an example in which the presence / absence of a notice is determined in Ss04 of FIG. 30, the number of successes is determined in Ss05, and the control data of the success pattern is set in Ss13 for the determined number of successes. explained. However, regarding the type of control data to be set, instead of the processing of Ss04 to Ss06 in FIG. 30, processing for setting the value corresponding to the basic period of the initial preparation data to the value of the freeze period counter is performed, and in Ss13 each time , It may be determined whether to use a success pattern, a notice pattern, or a failure pattern. For example, in Ss13, a predetermined lottery is performed to determine which of success A, success B, notice A, notice B, and failure, and the type of control data according to the decision result, Control data in which a period corresponding to the value of the adjustment counter is added to the basic period may be set, and reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R may be executed based on the control data. In this case, the success pattern is determined at a higher rate after being determined as the notice pattern than when it is not determined as the notice pattern. Further, a value corresponding to the basic period of the type of control data according to the determination result is added to the value of the current freeze period counter. Even in such a configuration, the timing for ending the control based on the control data of the success pattern, the advance notice pattern, or the failure pattern is determined depending on whether the control is started by the operation or the timing at which the operation is performed. Regardless, the timing can be common, and the control based on the control data of the failure pattern can be terminated when the period specified by the freeze period counter elapses. As a result, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

[About commands]
In the second embodiment described above, based on the freeze command and the operation command from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing when the symbol is stopped by the control based on the notification data and the operation reception period. And the example which performs the lottery result corresponding | compatible effect and the operation effect was demonstrated. However, the main control unit 41 outputs a symbol stop command when the symbol is stopped by the control based on the notification data, and outputs an operation reception start command when the operation reception period is started. A lottery result corresponding effect may be executed when a symbol stop command is received, and an operation effect may be executed when an operation reception start command is received.

[About specific effects that change the execution period]
In the above-described second embodiment, the example in which the execution period of the specific effect executed based on the operation is changed every time the operation is performed during the freeze has been described. Of the specific effects to be executed, only the execution period of the specific effects that satisfy the predetermined condition may be changed, and the execution period of the specific effects that do not satisfy the predetermined condition may not be changed.

  For example, every time an operation is performed during the freeze, the remaining time of the specific effect finished by the operation is cumulatively added, and it is determined whether or not the cumulative added time is a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. When it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the accumulated time is added to the basic period of the specific effect executed based on the operation, and the accumulated time is not longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Even when the specific effect to be started is the last specific effect (failure pattern) even when determined, the accumulated time may be added to the basic period of the specific effect to be started. Even in this case, the freeze occurs and the operation is accepted early in the operation reception period, and even though the specific effect based on the operation has been executed and has already ended, only the freeze is continued after that. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies that may occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to have an impression that the player has waited in vain, and to improve the interest of the game by the specific effect executed during the freeze period and the freeze.

[Returning to the initial position at the end of the freeze]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so as to be the initial position held at the end of the freeze and the initial position is restored has been described. However, the method of returning to the initial position is not limited to this, and in the above-described embodiment, the frame number data of the initial preparation data is defined as “11”, “14”, and “11” for the left middle right. In view of the fact that the state is maintained even when the control by the failure pattern is started, as the frame number data of each of the left, middle and right by the failure pattern, the reel makes one turn and the control by the initial preparation data is performed. Return to the initial position by setting “10”, “7”, “10” to return to the symbol position immediately before starting, and proceeding by the number of frames specified from the frame number data for each of the reels 2L to 2R You may make it make it. In this case, it is not necessary to perform initial position detection control, initial position return control, and the like, and the reel effect control during freezing can be performed only with predetermined frame number data, so that the processing burden can be reduced.

[Timing related to execution of the specified performance]
In the first embodiment described above, the timing at which an operation to the start switch 7 that triggers the execution of the predetermined effect is illustrated as the timing related to the execution of the predetermined effect, but the timing related to the execution of the predetermined effect is illustrated. Is not limited to this as long as it is a predetermined timing after the execution trigger of the predetermined effect is established. For example, the timing at which the predetermined effect is started, a predetermined period after the predetermined effect is started (for example, 0.5 The timing when the predetermined effect ends, the timing when the predetermined effect ends, or the timing when a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses may be used.

[Relationship between freeze and benefits]
In the above-described embodiment, even if a freeze occurs, an example in which a navigation stock as a privilege is not granted unless a successful pattern is determined by pattern lottery or the number of successes is determined to be 1 or more has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a freeze occurs, a privileged Navi stock may be given. For example, in the first embodiment, a successful pattern may always be determined in the first pattern lottery when a freeze occurs. In the second embodiment, the success count may be determined from one or more times in the success count lottery. Thereby, the expectation with respect to being controlled by freeze can be improved further.

[About benefits]
In the above-described embodiment, an example of Navistock, which has a value that directly affects the medal payout rate, has been described as a privilege. However, the privilege is not limited to a value that directly affects the medal payout rate, but may be a value that does not directly affect the medal payout rate. As the privilege, for example, the above-mentioned navigation stock is given, the suggestion effect is used to suggest whether the probability mode is the high probability mode, the privilege effect is executed together with the voice on the liquid crystal display 51 (special character appears) Executed during special bonus during next bonus, etc.) Execution of setting value suggestion effect to suggest set value, set at a game shop where slot machine 1 is installed by collecting a certain number A QR code (registered trademark) capable of downloading points that can be exchanged for a service, and downloading privilege video and privilege information on a predetermined website may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

[Freeze-related processing]
In the freeze-related processing in the above-described embodiment, when a chance is won between the BB1 or BB2 winning and the freeze occurrence determination timing, an example of determining the occurrence of freeze at a higher rate than when no chance is won Explained. However, in the freeze-related process, the higher the number of chance wins, the higher the percentage of freezes may be decided. Also, not limited to chance wins, the number of chance wins won, or other roles won or won Depending on the number of times, the occurrence of freeze may be determined at a different rate. In addition, according to the type of BB that has won a prize, the rate at which freeze is determined in the occurrence of freeze in the BB may be varied.

[Variation control during freeze in a specific game]
In the above-described embodiment, the example of controlling the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R as the variation control during the freeze in the specific game has been described. Control is performed for any one of the reel 2C and the right reel 2R (for example, the right reel 2R only) or two predetermined reels (for example, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R). Also good. In this case, the specific appearance or the advance notice may be, for example, an output in which a specific symbol of the reel to be controlled among the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R is stopped at a predetermined position.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the fluctuation control during the freeze in the specific game, the reel to be controlled is changed (rotated) and then stopped (rotation stopped). As a specific display state that can occur only when variation control is performed according to the success pattern in the specific game after the “white 7-white 7-black BAR” is stopped, “black 7-black 7-” is displayed on the winning line L1. Although the example in which the specific outcome such as “Black 7” is temporarily stopped has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and after changing (rotating) the reel to be controlled, the fluctuation (rotation) speed is reduced (player) As a specific display state, the combination of symbols that pass through the winning line L1 when the variation rate is low is “black 7-black 7-black 7” or the like. Special It may be in a state to be the outcome. In addition, the specific display state is not limited to these, and any display state may be used as long as the player can distinguish.

[About specific prizes and specific display results]
In the above-described embodiment, the BAR cherry is illustrated as the specific prize and the special consisting of the BAR cherry + melon 1 + strawberry is illustrated as the specific result. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, as the specific display result, the display result in which “WHITE 7-WHITE 7-WHITE 7” is stopped on the winning line L1 while the BAR cherry tree wins has been described as an example. However, the display result is not limited to this. For example, the specific winning may be one type of winning, and the specific display result may be one winning display result constituting the one type of specific winning. In addition, when a specific winning is permitted but the determination result is different from the specific result, a predetermined display result (whether or not the display result is to generate a winning) is displayed on the specific winning line among the plurality of winning lines. In the case of deriving, the specific display result may be a display result for deriving the predetermined display result to a special winning line different from the specific winning line. In addition, the specific display result is not limited to the one that includes the symbol that causes the winning, but is established when, for example, a predetermined display result such as “white 7-white 7-white 7” is stopped on the winning line L1. It may be.

[Navigation production in the general gaming state]
The navigation target combination in the above-described embodiment is the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 including the promotion lip when in the normal gaming state, and the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 including the rushing lip or the falling lip when it is RT3, The push order rush replays 1 to 4 and the push order melons 1 to 5 have been described for RT4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may make it alert | report that the winning combination of a strawberry or a grape was won when a winning combination was included including a strawberry and a grape.

  In addition, push order melons 1 to 5 may be included in the navigation target combination in the normal gaming state and RT3. In this case, the navigation that is executed in RT3 is performed in order to prevent the game from proceeding in such a way as to increase the number of medals without consuming the navigation stock by allowing the game to continue in RT3 without being controlled by RT4. You may make it perform the process which imposes a predetermined | prescribed penalty on condition that the stop operation was carried out in the pushing order different from the pushing order recalled from production. The predetermined penalty may be any disadvantageous to the player in whether or not it is controlled by the AT. For example, when the AT lottery condition is satisfied, an AT lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player is performed. It may be a thing to make. For example, the AT flag indicating that it is not AT may be rewritten to forcibly terminate the AT, or the AT lottery may not be performed even if the AT lottery condition is satisfied.

[Melon winning line]
In the above-described embodiment, when any of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, the operation procedure is stopped in a predetermined push order according to the type of the push order melon selected. On condition that the switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, the condition that the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the middle stage and the melon 1 is won in three lines, and is operated by an operation procedure different from the predetermined pushing order. As an example, an example in which the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the upper stage and the melon 1 is won in one winning line has been described. However, the number of winning lines that the melon 1 wins when operated according to an operation procedure in a predetermined pushing order is not limited to three winning lines, and if there are a plurality of winning lines, for example, two or four winning lines. Also good. In addition, the number of winning lines that the melon 1 wins when operated in a procedure other than the operation procedure in a predetermined push order is not limited to one pay line, but is operated in an operation procedure in a predetermined push order For example, a plurality of winning lines may be used as long as the number of winning lines is smaller than the number of winning lines to be won.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the procedure for stopping the left, middle and right reels in a predetermined order has been described as an example of the procedure for performing the reel control for allowing the melon 1 to win a plurality of winning lines. However, the procedure for performing reel control for winning melon 1 to a plurality of winning lines is not limited to this, and may be a procedure for secondly stopping a predetermined reel among the left, middle, and right reels. The procedure may be to stop a predetermined reel among the left, middle and right reels first. Thereby, since the variation of the procedure in which the reel control which makes the melon 1 win a some winning line increases is performed, an interest can be improved.

[Reel control when pushing order melon is won]
In the embodiment described above, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is selected in FIG. 14, the operation is performed according to the operation procedure having the predetermined push order and the operation having the predetermined push order. An example has been described in which different reel control is performed when operated by a procedure other than the procedure. However, the different reel controls are not limited to those shown in FIG. 14. For example, when the reels are operated according to an operation procedure in a predetermined pushing order, the winning combination that has not been won for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R. Except for a case where a prize is won, control to stop at the timing of stop operation (control not to delay stop) is performed, and when operated in a procedure other than the operation procedure in a predetermined pushing order, the left reel 2L and the right reel For each of the 2Rs, control may be performed to stop the delay with a stop delay from the timing of the stop operation, unless a winning combination that has not been won wins.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when one of the pressing order melons 1 to 5 is selected, the “melon-melon-melon” pattern is displayed when operated in accordance with an operation procedure having a predetermined pressing order. The combination is stopped at the winning line L3 or L4, and the reel control is performed so that the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” is stopped at the winning line L2 when operated in an operation procedure other than a predetermined pressing order. You may comprise. In such a configuration, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is selected and the first stop is performed and the left reel 2L or the right reel 2R is stopped, the first stop is performed. Regardless of whether or not the operation procedure is in a predetermined pushing order, the reel control is performed so that the “melon” of the corresponding reel is stopped at the upper stage, and the operation procedure after the first stop and the second stop is performed. Accordingly, the reel control is performed to stop the “melon” on the winning line L3 or L4 when the predetermined pressing order is reached, and the reel control to stop the “melon” on the winning line L2 when the predetermined pressing order is not achieved. You may comprise so that it may carry out. As a result, even if the reels that do not constitute the symbol combination of melon 1 by the first stop (for example, the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R) are stopped, Stop control is performed so that the symbol combination “-melon” can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the first stop is a stop operation that matches the predetermined pushing order from the outcome stopped by the first stop. The expectation can be sustained.

[Other variations]
(1) A process of clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stock remains may be performed. May be performed, a process of subtracting a predetermined number may be performed, a process of adding and adding a predetermined number may be performed, and which process is to be performed every time the bonus is won It may be determined and the determined processing is performed. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stocks remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. It may be a slot machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variable display device having the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided. When all the reels are stopped, one game is finished, and the combination of the display results derived to the three reels. The slot machine where a prize is generated according to the above is explained. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable can be used for one game using game value. On the other hand, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets, and the display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. The slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas has been described. However, when a display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display device. As long as the slot machine can be generated, the slot machine is not limited to one having a variable display device having three reels, but has a single reel or a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. It may be. In addition, if the variable display device has a variable display area that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified in a predetermined order, the plurality of symbols are in a predetermined order. For example, a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a predetermined image and scrolling a plurality of symbols in a predetermined order may be used. .

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the promotion lip winning procedure, the rushing lip winning procedure, the fall replay avoidance procedure, and the “melon” of the middle reel 2 </ b> C in the middle Although the example in which the stopping procedure is the pressing order of the stopping operation has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stopping operation timing may be included, and only the pressing order or only the stopping operation timing may be included. Not only a thing but what may become a pressing order + stop operation timing may be sufficient.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a special outcome that is a missed outcome at the time of winning the SB is derived to shift from RT1 or RT2 to the normal gaming state has been described. This is not the only opportunity for transition. For example, not only when winning the SB, but when the specific winning combination (specific small combination, specific re-playing combination) cannot be generated when the specific winning combination is won, Alternatively, it may be to win another specific winning combination that can be won at the same time as the specific winning combination.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the player is promoted to RT3 from the normal gaming state by winning the promotion lip, and is transferred from RT3 to RT4 by winning the rushing lip. The opportunity to be promoted to and the opportunity to transition from RT3 to RT4 are not limited to this. For example, the symbol combination that stops only when a predetermined winning combination is missed may be stopped. Accordingly, it is possible to add an interest that the gaming state is shifted instead of missing a predetermined winning combination.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which AT for one navigation stock is terminated by digesting 50 games has been described. However, the period for which the AT is controlled corresponding to one Navistock is not limited to the period for which the game is digested for a predetermined number of times, but the number of times determined by random lottery using random numbers from a plurality of types of times The number of times a specific winning combination (for example, a strawberry) is won reaches the predetermined number of times during the period of digesting the minute game, the period until the number of times that the navigation effect is executed after winning the navigation target role reaches the predetermined number It may be a period until.

  (7) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number circuit, 43 pulse oscillator, 51 liquid crystal display Device, 56 effect switch, 90 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM.

Claims (1)

A variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable in a predetermined order,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before display results are derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
After the start of the game, an effective reception state control means for effectively receiving the operation of the derivation operation means;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the effective reception state; ,
An activation delay means for setting a delay period when the delay condition is satisfied, and delaying an activation timing for setting the effective reception state over the delay period than when the delay condition is not satisfied; ,
Operation accepting means for accepting an operation different from the operation of the deriving operation means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is accepted by the operation accepting means during the delay period, the plurality of variable display areas are arranged so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the variable display areas becomes a predetermined positional relationship. An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect by performing variable control of the variable display area, and executing the predetermined effect until the specific timing in the delay period is reached regardless of the timing at which the predetermined effect is started,
The positional relationship when the predetermined effect is ended so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas that has become the predetermined positional relationship by executing the predetermined effect is random. And a positional relationship determining means for determining by the time when the predetermined effect is started,
In the delay period after the start of the game, the effect executing means is configured to store the plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship between the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is the predetermined positional relationship. After performing the variation control, the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is changed to the positional relationship determined by the positional relationship determining means,
In the delay period, the effective reception state control means is changed to a positional relationship in which the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each of the plurality of variable display areas is determined by the positional relationship determination unit by the effect execution unit. After that, the slot machine is placed in the valid reception state.

Images